eunice 16 apartments - pavilion construction 16/14 - contract... · 012000 price and payment...

10 AUGUST 2015

PROJECT MANUAL

Eunice 16 Apartments EUNICE NEW MEXICO

EASTERN REGIONAL HOUSING AUTHORITY 106 East Reed Street Roswell, NM 88203

ARCHITECT OF RECORD

Autotroph, Inc. 422 Greg Avenue Santa Fe, NM 87501 Phone: (505) 216-7555 autotrophdesign.com

EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

TABLE OF CONTENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

Section No. Section Reference Page Codes Numbers

10 AUGUST 2015

TOC - 1

000115 List of Drawings 000115 1 to 2

ARCHITECTURAL

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

012000 Price and Payment Procedures 012000 1 TO 2

012500 Substitution Procedures 012500 1

012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 1

013000 Administrative Requirements 013000 1 to 4

014000 Quality Requirements 014000 1 to 2

014200 References 014200 1 to 2

015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000 1 to 3

016000 Product Requirements 016000 1 to 2

017000 Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000 1 to 6

017419 Construction Waste Management 017419 1 to 2

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

035413 Cementitious Underlayment 035413 1 to 5

DIVISION 05 – METAL STAIRS

055100 Metal Stairs 055100 1 to 8

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

061053 Miscellaneous Carpentry 061053 1 to 2

062000 Finish Carpentry 062000 1 to 2

067300 Composite Wood Decking 067300 1 to 6

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072100 Thermal Insulation 072100 1

072500 Weather Barriers 072500 1 to 6

074113 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 074113 1 to 4

075113 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing 075400 1 to 9

076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200 1 to 5

078413 Through Penetration Firestop Systems 078413 1 to 2

079200 Joint Sealants 079200 1 to 5


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


10 AUGUST 2015

TOC - 2

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

080000 Door Schedule 080000 1

081416 Flush Wood Doors and Frames 081416 1 to 3

081600 Gliding Patio Doors 081600 1 to 6

081613 Fiberglass Entry Doors 081613 1 to 2

085000 Window Schedule 085000 1

085400 Composite Windows 085313 1 to 5

087100 Door Hardware 087100 1 to 4

088300 Mirrors 088300 1 to 2

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

090000 Finish Schedule 090000 1

092400 Exterior Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) 092400 1 to 7

092900 Gypsum Board 092900 1 to 4

093013 Ceramic Tiling 093013 1 to 5

096500 Resilient Flooring 096000 1 to 4

099000 Painting 099100 1 to 8

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101423 Signs 101423 1 to 3

102800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 102800 1 to 3

104416 Fire Extinguishers 104416 1 to 2

105000 Postal Specialties 105000 1 to 6

106700 Storage Shelving 106700 1 to 4

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 122113 1

122116 Vertical Louver Blinds 123530 1

123530 Residential Casework 123530 1 to 4

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

313116 Termite Control 313116 1 to 4

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

323113 Chain Link Fences 313116 1


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


10 AUGUST 2015

TOC - 3

STRUCTURAL DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

031000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000 1 to 4

032000 Concrete Reinforcement 032000 1 to 3

033000 Cast-in Place Concrete 033000 1 to 7

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051000 Structural Steel 051000 1 to 5

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

061000 Rough Carpentry 061000 1 to 4

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072600 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier for Concrete Slabs-on-Grade 072600 1 to 4

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

312311 Earthwork for Building Construction 312311 1 to 5

FIRE PROTECTION

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

210553 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 210553 1 to 2

211300 Fire Suppression Sprinklers 211300 1 to 5

213000 Fire Pumps 213000 1 to 3

PLUMBING

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220500 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 220500 1 to 4

220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 1

220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220719 1 to 3

221005 Plumbing Piping 221005 1 to 8

221006 Plumbing Piping Specialties 221006 1 to 4

223000 Plumbing Equipment 223000 1 to 2

224000 Plumbing Fixtures 224000 1 to 2


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


10 AUGUST 2015

TOC - 4

MECHANICAL

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230500 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 230500 1 to 5

230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 1 to 2

230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593 1 to 6

230713 Duct Insulation 230713 1 to 4

230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230719 1 to 3

233300 Air Duct Accessories 233300 1 to 4

233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 233416 1 to 3

233700 Air Outlets and Inlets 233700 1 to 2

238127 Small Split-System Heating and Cooling 238127 1 to 3

ELECTRICAL

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 260500 1 to 5

260534 Conduit 260534 1 to 8

260537 Boxes 260537 1 to 5

260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 1 to 6

262726 Wiring Devices 262726 1 to 6

262813 Fuses 262813 1 to 2

265100 Interior Lighting 265100 1 to 8

265600 Exterior Lighting 265600 1 to 6

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

283100 Fire Detection and Alarm 283100 1 to 6

GEOTECHNICAL Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 to 34

SECTION 000115 - LIST OF DRAWINGS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

000115 - 1 00115

LIST OF DRAWINGS

Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Eunice 16 Apartments, dated 31 JULY 2015, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated:

GENERAL G0.0 COVER SHEET G0.1 GENERAL NOTES, CODE ANALYSIS, ZONING

ARCHITECTURAL A1.0 SITE PLAN A1.1 BUILDING PLANS, APARTMENT PLANS A1.2 ROOF PLAN, DETAILS A2.1 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A3.0 BUILDING SECTION, WALL SECTION, DETAILS A3.1 BUILDING SECTION, WALL SECTION, DETAILS A3.2 WALL SECTIONS A3.3 WALL SECTIONS, OPENING DETAILS A4.1 ENLARGED KITCHEN PLANS & ELEVATIONS A4.2 ENLARGED BATHROOM PLANS & ELEVATIONS A5.1 DETAILS A5.2 DETAILS A5.3 DETAILS A5.4 ENLARGED STAIR PLANS AND SECTIONS A5.5 STAIR DETAILS A5.6 SITE DETAILS

CIVIL C1.0 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C2.0 DETAILS C2.1 DETAILS C2.2 DETAILS C3.0 CIVIL HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C4.0 OVERALL GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN CIVIL LEGEND C4.1 SITE GRADING DETAIL PLAN C5.0 UTILITY PLAN

STRUCTURAL S-001 ABBREVIATIONS AND LEGEND S-002 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S-003 SPECIAL INSPECTION TABLES S-101 FOUNDATION PLAN S-102 FRAMING PLANS S-311 FOUNDATION SECTIONS

SECTION 000115 - LIST OF DRAWINGS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

000115 - 2 00115

S-321 FLOOR FRAMING SECTIONS S-331 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS S-501 TYPICAL FRAMING DETAILS S-601 SCHEDULES S-701 TYPICAL WOOD DETAILS

MECHANICAL M0.1 MECHANICAL LEGEND, GENERAL NOTES M1.0 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS

PLUMBING SU1.1 PLUMBING SITE UTILITY PLAN P1.1 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN - 2 BEDROOM - FIRST FLOOR P1.2 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN - 1 BEDROOM - FIRST FLOOR P2.1 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN - 2 BEDROOM - SECOND FLOOR P2.2 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN - 1 BEDROOM - SECOND FLOOR P3.0 PLUMBING DETAILS & LEGEND P4.0 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS P5.0 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE & GENERAL NOTES

FIRE PROTECTION FP0.1 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES FP0.2 FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS FP1.0 FIRE PROTECTION SITE PLAN FP2.0 FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN FP2.1 FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN

ELECTRICAL E0.0 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES E1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.1 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN - 2 BEDROOM APARTMENT E2.0 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN 1ST AND 2ND FLOOR E3.0 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAMS, DETAILS E4.0 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES

END OF DOCUMENT 000115


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

ARCHITECTURAL


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 012000 – PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

012000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

ALLOWANCES

Advise Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described by an al-lowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include rec-ommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfill-ment of each allowance.

Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, delivery to Project site and installation.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Submit a Schedule of Values at least seven days before the initial Application for Payment. Break down the Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section in the Project Manual table of con-tents. Coordinate the schedule of values with Contractor's construction schedule.

Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.

Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applica-tions for Payment.

Submit three copies of each application for payment according to the schedule established in Own-er/Contractor Agreement.

Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.

With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity in-volved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

Include insurance certificates, proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid, and evi-dence that claims have been settled.

Include affidavit of payment of debts and claims on AIA Document G706.

Include affidavit of release of liens on AIA Document G706A.

SECTION 012000 – PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

012000 - 2

Include consent of surety to final payment on AIA Document G707.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

Landscaping Allowance: Allow the sum of $20,000.00 for the purchase, delivery and installation of land-scaping plants, irrigation and materials.

END OF SECTION 012000

SECTION 012500 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

012500 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

Substitutions include changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

Substitution Requests: Submit electronic copy of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrica-tion or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or a facsimile.

Submit requests within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed.

Identify product to be replaced and show compliance with requirements for substitutions. Include a de-tailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified, a list of changes needed to other parts of the Work required to accommodate proposed substitution, and any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.

Architect will review proposed substitutions and notify Contractor of their acceptance or rejection. If neces-sary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation.

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of re-ceipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is lat-er.

Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

012600 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjust-ment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work.

Proposal Requests are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Con-tractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor, for all changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construc-tion Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data neces-sary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 013000 – ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

013000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

Subcontract List: Submit a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work.

Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including project manager, superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. List e-mail addresses and telephone numbers.

Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.

Requests for Information (RFIs): On discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI. Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner.

Schedule and conduct progress meetings at Project site at monthly intervals. Notify Owner and Architect of meeting dates and times. Require attendance of each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities.

Record minutes and distribute to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect.

SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Ar-chitect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of provided by the Architect and their consultants.

Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activ-ities that require sequential activity.

No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

Submit electronic copies of each action submittal.

Submit electronic copies of each informational submittal. Architect will return electronic copies indicat-ing that they have been reviewed.

Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

013000 - 2

Name file with unique identifier, including project identifier, Specification Section number, and revision identifier.

Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and ac-tion taken by Architect.

Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

Contractor's Construction Schedule Submittal Procedure:

Submit required submittals in the following format:

PDF electronic file.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for en-tire construction period.

Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, and labeled to comply with requirements for submit-tals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specifica-tion Sections.

Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable products and options. Include the following:

Manufacturer's written recommendations, product specifications, and installation instructions.

Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

Printed performance curves and operational range diagrams.

Testing by recognized testing agency.

Compliance with specified standards and requirements.

Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Draw-ings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Include the following:

Dimensions and identification of products.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

013000 - 3

Fabrication and installation drawings and roughing-in and setting diagrams.

Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

Notation of coordination requirements.

Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Include name of manu-facturer and product name on label.

If variation is inherent in material or product, submit at least three sets of paired units that show varia-tions.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and ad-dresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES

Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design profes-sional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written re-quest for additional information to Architect.

Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit electronic copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Docu-ments. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and indicate date by which recovery will be accom-plished.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

013000 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

SUBMITTAL REVIEW

Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submit-ting to Architect.

Architect will review each action submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will it, indicating that it has been re-viewed for information only, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and will be returned.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

Distribute copies of approved schedule to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, testing and inspecting agen-cies, and parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties.


SECTION 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

014000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION REQUIREMENTS

Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document re-quirements.

Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties to Archi-tect for a decision.

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum. The actual installation may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Indicated numeric values are min-imum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision.

Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract

Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, notices, receipts for fee payments, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdic-tion where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicat-ed.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct test-ing and inspecting indicated; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

SECTION 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

014000 - 2

Associated Services: Cooperate with testing agencies and provide reasonable auxiliary services as request-ed. Provide the following:

Access to the Work. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist

agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment.

Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accom-modate testing and inspecting.

Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated in individual Speci-fication Sections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

REPAIR AND PROTECTION

General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged con-struction and restore substrates and finishes.

Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for qual-ity-control services.


SECTION 014200 – REFERENCES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

014200 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

DEFINITIONS

General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

"Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, ap-plications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

"Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect, and similar phrases.

"Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference.

"Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by au-thorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

"Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

"Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, un-packing, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, pro-tecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

"Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

"Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcon-tractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicat-ed; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

"Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

INDUSTRY STANDARDS

Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Con-tract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

SECTION 014200 – REFERENCES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

014200 - 2

Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indi-cated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer un-certainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry stand-ards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Docu-ments, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.




SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

015000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Use Charges: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated.

Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Submit plan showing compliance with requirements of EPA Con-struction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric ser-vice. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS

Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fab-ric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts and top and bottom rails.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

Provide field offices, storage and fabrication sheds, and other support facilities as necessary for construc-tion operations. Store combustible materials apart from building.

EQUIPMENT

Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and clas-ses of fire exposures.

HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohib-ited.

Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use dur-ing construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

015000 - 2

Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regu-lations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidi-ty. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being in-stalled.

Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction opera-tions, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the public and per-sons seeking entrance to Project.

Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from con-struction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with envi-ronmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flood-ing, and erosion.

Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations law-fully, using environmentally safe materials.

Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily enter-ing site except by entrance gates.

Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities. Comply with NFPA 241.

MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

Before installation of weather barriers, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

015000 - 3

Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

Remove standing water from decks.

Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, protect as fol-lows:

Do not load or install drywall or porous materials into partially enclosed building.

Discard water-damaged material.

Do not install material that is wet.

Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by author-ized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.

At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

016000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify prod-uct or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.

Show compliance with requirements for comparable product requests.

Architect will review the proposed product and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection.

Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Show compliance with requirements.

Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products, select product compatible with products previously selected.

Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construc-tion spaces.

Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicat-ed, are new at the time of installation.

Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

SECTION 016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

016000 - 2

Where the following headings are used to list products or manufacturers, the Contractor's options for prod-uct selection are as follows:

Products:

Where requirements include "one of the following," provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements or a comparable product.

Manufacturers:

Where requirements include "one of the following," provide a product that complies with require-ments by one of the listed manufacturers.

Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide a product that complies with requirements by one of the listed manufacturers or another manufacturer.

Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product named, or indicated on the Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the listed manufacturers.

Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satis-fied:

Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is con-sistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifica-tions.

Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

List of similar installations for completed projects, if requested.

Samples, if requested.



SECTION 017000 – EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

Cutting and Patching:

Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and de-tails of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support struc-tural elements during cutting and patching.

Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opin-ion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.

Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommenda-tions and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit three copies of manual.

PDF Electronic File: Assemble manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media.

Record Drawings: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.

Record Digital Data Files: Submit data file and one set of plots.

Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, complete the following:

Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

Submit closeout submittals specified in other sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, similar final record information, warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017000 - 2

Submit maintenance material submittals specified in other sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect.

Submit test/adjust/balance records.

Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, complete the following:

Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. Remove temporary facilities and controls. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Archi-tect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be com-pleted or corrected before certificate will be issued.

FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining final completion, com-plete the following:

Submit a final Application for Payment.

Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved.

Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insur-ance requirements.

Submit pest-control final inspection report.

Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either pro-ceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017000 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS

In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use ma-terials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION

Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize manual into separate sections for each system and subsystem, and separate sections for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Organize data into three-ring binders with identification on front and spine of each binder, and envelopes for folded drawings. Include the following:

Manufacturer's operation and maintenance documentation. Maintenance and service schedules. Maintenance service contracts. Include name and telephone number of service agent. Emergency instructions. Spare parts list and local sources of maintenance materials. Wiring diagrams. Copies of warranties. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims

RECORD DRAWINGS

Record Prints: Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. Mark to show actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings.

Format: Annotated PDF electronic file.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017000 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicat-ed as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and loca-tion of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.

Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with In-staller or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.

Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING

Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks.

Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project.

At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having juris-diction as the official "property survey."

INSTALLATION

Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces unless otherwise indicated and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017000 - 5

Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed.

Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and num-ber to securely anchor each component in place. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

CUTTING AND PATCHING

Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

Cutting: Cut in-place construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining con-struction.

Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfac-es. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.

Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

CLEANING

Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Dispose of materials lawfully.

Remove liquid spills promptly.

Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion:


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017000 - 6

Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities. Sweep paved are-as; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

Remove labels that are not permanent.

Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.

Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances. Sweep concrete floors broom clean.

Wax resilient flooring.

Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and foreign sub-stances. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors.

Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, regis-ters, and grills.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PREPARATION

Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indi-cating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incor-porated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using ap-propriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete refer-ences to information not applicable.

Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are unavailable and where the in-formation is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsys-tems, and equipment not part of a system. Include a detailed review of the following:

Include instruction for basis of system design and operational requirements, review of documentation, emergency procedures, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repairs.


SECTION 017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANGEMENT AND DISPOSAL EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017419 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Action Submittals:

Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.

Informational Submittals:

Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Submit concurrent with each Application for Payment. Include total quantity of waste, total quantity of waste salvaged and recycled, and percentage of total waste sal-vaged and recycled.

Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations.

Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Sec-tion 013000 "Administrative Requirements." Review methods and procedures related to waste manage-ment.

Waste Management Plan: Develop a waste management plan consisting of waste identification, waste re-duction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 25 percent by weight of total nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

SECTION 017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANGEMENT AND DISPOSAL EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

017419 - 2

Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as ap-propriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

RECYCLING WASTE

General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

Packaging:

Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pal-lets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

Wood Materials:

Sort and stack reusable members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

Metals: Separate metals by type.

DISPOSAL OF WASTE

Except for items or materials to be recycled remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Do not burn waste materials.


SECTION 035413 – CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

035413 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

Description of Work: Work of this sections includes self-leveling underlayment for interior finish flooring in fire and sound rated floor assemblies.

REFERENCES

ASTM C472 Compressive Strength ASTM C33 Sand Aggregate ASTM D4263 Standard test method for indicating moisture in concrete ASTM F2419 Standard test method for installation of thick poured Gypsum concrete and preparation of surface to receive resilient flooring ASTM E492 Impact Insulation Class (IIC) ASTM E90 Sound Transmission Class (STC)

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions with project conditions and materials clearly identified or detailed for each required product or system.

Acoustical Data: Submit sound tests according to IBC code criteria ASTM E492 (IIC) and ASTM E90 (STC)

Submit in writing that all sound tests or data provided has been tested according to UL (Underwriters Laboratory) fire resistance design number 521.

Sound Control

Minimum Impact Insulation Class, 50 IIC (45 if field tested) Minimum Sound Transmission Class, 50 STC (45 if field tested)

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Performance Requirements:

Cementitious Floor Underlayment

Minimum compressive strength 2,500 psi. Minimum density 115 pounds per cubic foot.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Performance Standards:

All materials, unless otherwise indicated, shall be installed in accordance with its current printed direc-tions and by the manufacturer’s authorized applicator.

Product compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and finished flooring system certify in writing that products are compatible.

Underlayment mix shall be tested for a slump using a 2” (i.d.) x 4” cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8”-9 1/2”.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

035413 - 2

At least one set of three molded cube samples shall be taken from each day’s pour or every 10,000 square feet whichever is less during the underlayment application. Cube shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C472.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure from the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Before, during, and after installation of product, building interior shall be enclosed, with adequate ventila-tion and heat maintained at a temperature above 50_ F to allow for drying of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

Basis of Design Manufacturer: USG Corporation

125 S. Franklin Street, Chicago, IL 60606; Telephone (800) 487-4431; www.levelrock.com

MATERIALS

Poured flooring underlayment and topping products, including the following:

LEVELROCK 2500 Floor Underlayment:

Material: Gypsum Cement.

Minimum Compressive Strength (ASTM C472): 2,500psi. (Avg. 2,500 -3,200) psi (17.24 – 22.06) MPa.

Nominal Average Density: 115 pounds per cubic foot

ACCESSORIES

LEVELROCK TM Brand Primer

Material Standard: Comply with specifications outlined in manufacturer’s Applicator Manual for wood and concrete.

LEVELROCK TM SE-100™ Surface Enhancer

Material Standard: Comply with specifications outlined in manufacturer’s applicator manual.

Mix Water:

Material Standard: Potable, free from impurities and from domestic source.

Sand Aggregate:

Sand shall meet ASTM C33 as well as specifications outlined in manufacturer’s applicator manual.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

035413 - 3

Sound Control Mat that does not negate the fire rating and can be specified by a UL design. Acoustical performance is dependant on system design and construction. Values shown represent typical im-provements. Systems tested in accordance with ASTM E90 (STC) and ASTM 492 (IIC)

LEVELROCK SRM-25 Sound Mat

REPAIR

ULTRAFLOW Floor Patch

High polymer-modified blend of engineered cements

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Site Verification of Conditions:

Wood substrate shall be structurally sound, properly fastened, and dry. Contractor shall clean subfloor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminating factors before arrival of the authorized applicator.

Wood substrate:

Limit design of subfloor and framing to a minimum L/360

Wood should be APA rated T&G or back blocked at joints.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

REQUIREMENTS

Leak Prevention:

Fill cracks and voids in subfloor where leakage of slurry could occur using compressed building insula-tion, a suitable quick-setting patch material or caulk.

Priming subfloor:

Prime substrate according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Instructions and the number of coats will vary depending on application.

Wood substrate: LEVELROCK TM Primer (concentrate, ready mix, or powdered).

Application:

Installation shall not begin until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, doors, and any other apertures.

Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer’s instructions and as required to com-ply with seismic requirements.

GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Mixing Proportions:

Mix design shall be proportioned to provide an average compressive strength of 2500 psi or greater with a density of 115 pounds per cubic foot.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

035413 - 4

Underlayment mix shall be tested for slump using a 2 inch (i.d.) x 4 inch cylinder resulting a patty size of 8” - 9”.

Application:

Pour floor topping to recommended thickness. Immediately spread and screed product to a smooth sur-face. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

Wood: Minimum thickness as indicated but not less than 1”.

When application requires a sound mat or board, the installation of a perimeter isolation strip is re-quired prior to pouring floor topping. Refer to product literature or Applicator Manual for details.

Field Quality Control:

Underlayment mix shall be tested for a slump using a 2” (i.d.) x 4” cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8” - 9”. Slump shall be taken at the beginning of each installation to verify required mix. Slump should be tested periodically thereafter at a minimum of every 2500 sq. ft. to verify it is being maintained dur-ing installation.

Protection:

After installation protect floor with plywood for heavy traffic areas and non-staining FIBEROCK TM floor protective paper for all other areas.

INSTALLATION OF FINISH FLOOR

General Requirements:

Damaged areas of the underlayment must be repaired prior to applying any sealer or treatment.

Heavily soiled floors need to be cleaned and free from paint, dirt, dust,or foreign matter. The use of oil based sweeping compounds is prohibited.

Apply only LEVELROCK® approved sealers or surface enhancer as recommended by application and by the manufacturer.

Fasteners to be installed in underlayment must be designed for use in concrete or masonry systems.

Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding moisture levels and vapor retarders before proceed-ing with installation of finish floor system.

Floor must be dry prior to installation of finished floor or application of floor coatings. Check dryness by taping an 18” x18” section of plastic and checking for condensation or discoloration after 16 – 24 hours (ASTM D4263) or use a Protimeter® SM Survey Master following floor underlayment recommen-dations.

Preventative maintenance, cautions, and procedures.

Resilient Floor Applications:

Follow floor-covering and or adhesive manufacturer’s guidelines for:

Primer use.

Proper application and procedures (ASTM F2419).

Adequate curing or setting time prior to allowing traffic on finished floor.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

035413 - 5

Proper trowel selections regarding porous-non porous substrates.

Ceramic Tile Applications:

Install ceramic tile in accordance with TCNA (Tile Council of North America, Inc.) printed recommenda-tions.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 055100 – METAL STAIRS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

Preassembled steel stairs with diamond plate formed-metal treads. All tread finishes by Contractor. Steel pipe railings attached to metal stairs.

Refuse enclosure gate fabrication.

Privacy screen fabrication.

Reference Standards:

American Disability Act (ADA)

ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1

American Institute of Steel Construction

Manual of Steel Construction Code of Standard Practice

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

AISI 121: Standard Definitions for Use in the Design of Steel Structures.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

ANSI A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities Standards.

ASTM International formerly American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM 1008: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened.

ASTM A1011/A 1011M: Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

ASTM A 283/A 283M: Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.

ASTM A 36/A 36M: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

ASTM A 513: Standard Specification for Electric-Resistence-Welded Carbon and Alloy Mechanical Tubing.

ASTM A 53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

ASTM A 6/A 6M: Standard specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 2

ASTM A 780/A 780M: ASTM A 786: Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.

ASTM E 894: Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

ASTM E935: Standard Test Method for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

American Welding Society (AWS):

AWS D1.1/D1.1M: Structural Welding Code - Steel.

AWS D1.3: Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

AMP 510-92: Metal Stair Manual

Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

SSPC-SP 3: Power Tool Cleaning

Miscellaneous:

Local construction codes and guidelines enforced by the local code officials having jurisdiction over code enforcement.


Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).

Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).

Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads speci-fied above.

Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to [L/240] [L/360] [L/720] or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less.

Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.

Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Infill of Guards:

Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).

Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 3

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, fail-ure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. See structural drawings for seismic requirements.

Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:

Metal floor plate treads. Paint products. Erection drawings (Hard/Electronic copies).

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, welds, and attachments to other work.

Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

Metal floor plate treads.


Welding certificates.

Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have produced the types of stair, platforms and railing systems specified in this section for not less than five (5) years.

Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 4

COORDINATION

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coat-ing manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

Contractor to coordinate, provide and install all anchors for metal stair erection. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

Contractor to coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

METALS, GENERAL

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For com-ponents exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

FERROUS METALS

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40.

Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. Diamond tread plate.

Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

FASTENERS

General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Se-lect fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 5

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 "Painting"

FABRICATION, GENERAL

Stringers shall be cut and formed from a single piece of stock for the full, design length. Splicing shall not be permitted.

Risers shall be solid and equally spaced to within 3/16” of any adjacent riser and within 3/8” of any two non-adjacent risers on the stair.

Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as neces-sary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approxi-mately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

Weld connections to comply with the following:

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

Remove welding flux immediately.

Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Stand-ards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use carriage bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

Stair Framing:

Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 6

Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers

Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from rolled-steel diamond floor plate of thickness 0.120 inch (11 GA).

Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers of same material as treads.

Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.

Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to platform framing.

STAIR RAILINGS

Steel Pipe Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, de-tails, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings.

Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square guard posts.

Mesh Infill: Welded wire mesh welded into 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) steel channel frames. Orient wire mesh with wires horizontal and vertical.

Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: complete-ly sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.

Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each re-petitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

Cap handrail return if exposed.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, and miscellaneous fittings for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.

Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves.

FINISHES

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 7

Finish metal stairs after assembly.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with the following.

Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop paint-ing.

Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless oth-erwise indicated.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Con-crete."

INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.

Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated.

Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

055100 - 8

INSTALLING RAILINGS

Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.

Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and an-chored with post installed anchors and bolts.

Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt an-chorage. Provide bracket with 2-1/4-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000 "Painting"


SECTION 061053 – MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

061053 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: ICC-ES evaluation reports for treated wood.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.

TREATED MATERIALS

Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Catego-ry UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Re-view.

Provide preservative-treated materials for items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in con-nection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

Wood sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

LUMBER

Interior Partition Framing: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 Northern species: NLGA; Mixed southern pine: SPIB; or Western woods: WCLIB or WWPA with 19 percent maximum moisture content.

Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade with 19 percent maximum moisture con-tent of any species. Provide for nailers, blocking, and similar members.

Concealed Boards: Northern species, No. 3 Common: NLGA; Mixed southern pine, No. 2: SPIB; or West-ern woods, Standard: WCLIB; or No. 3 Common: WWPA; with 19 percent maximum moisture content.

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

SECTION 061053 – MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

061053 - 2

FASTENERS

Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather or in ground contact provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel

Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Set miscellaneous rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other con-struction.

Securely attach miscellaneous rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following:

CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the IBC.


SECTION 062000 – FINISH CARPENTRY EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

062000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product data for MDF molding and trim products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS, GENERAL

Lumber: DOC PS 20 and grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 , made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted) in Bathrooms: Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades:

Grade 1 Common (Colonial), 2 Common (Sterling) Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or WWPA.

Base and Casing profile as indicated.

Moldings for Painted Finish in all rooms other than bathrooms: Primed medium-density fiberboard (MDF).

Base and Casing profile as indicated.


Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer.

Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Condition interior finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing.

Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit adjoin-ing work. Refinish and seal cuts.

Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.

Install standing and running trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from max-imum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where nec-

SECTION 062000 – FINISH CARPENTRY EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

062000 - 2

essary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and inside corners and miter at outside corners.


SECTION 067300 – COMPOSITE WOOD DECKING EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

067300 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

Composite wood decking.

Structural deck drainage systems.

REFERENCES

ASTM International (ASTM):

C177-04 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

D143-94(2000) - Standard Test Methods for Small Clear Specimens of Timber.

D198-05 - Standard Test Methods of Static Tests of Lumber in Structural Sizes.

D1037-06 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials.

D1413-05 - Standard Test Method for Wood Preservatives by Laboratory Soil-Block Cultures.

D1761-06 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood.

D1929-96(2001) - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics.

D2047-04 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

D2394-05 - Standard Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-Base Finish Flooring.

D2395-06 - Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Wood and Wood-Based Materials.

D4761-05 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Properties of Lumber and Wood-Base Structural Ma-terial.

E84-07 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

F1679-04 Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT).

American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) E1-06 - Standard Method for Laboratory Evaluation to De-termine Resistance to Subterranean Termites.

American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): AAMA 2603.02 - Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Fire Resistive Standards for Fire Protection.

SUBMITTALS

Submittals for Review:


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

067300 - 2

Product Data: Indicate sizes, profiles, surface finishes, installation instructions and performance charac-teristics.

Samples: 12 inch long decking samples illustrating size, profile, color, and surface finish.

Closeout Submittals:

Maintenance Data: Manufacturer’s instructions on care and cleaning of composite wood products.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING – COMPOSITE DECKING

Deliver, store, and handle composite wood in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Store composite wood level and flat, off ground or floor, with supports at each end and maximum 24 inch-es on center.

Do not stack composite wood over 12 feet high.

Cover composite wood with waterproof covering, vented to prevent moisture buildup.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING – STRUCTURAL DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards.

To stack, mate neighboring boards face to face and water channel to water channel. evenly spaced support blocks and on a level flat surface.

Do not exceed 4 ft (1219 mm) on center.

Do not stack above 3 ft (76 mm).

Do not stack multiple bundles.

Do not store varying profiles within the same stack.

Keep the finished face protected from abrasions and rough surfaces.

Do not handle or drag in a manner where the "Face" could become scratched.

Do not stack unsheathed.

Do not allow grit such as sand to become wedged in between faces of two boards.

Store products in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with labels clearly iden-tifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage.

WARRANTY – COMPOSITE DECKING

Furnish manufacturer’s 25 year warranty providing coverage against checking, splitting, splintering, rotting, structural damage from termites, and fungal decay of composite wood.

WARRANTY – STRUCTURAL DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEM

Manufacturer's Standard Limited Warranty:

Limited Lifetime Warranty for Structural Deck Drainage Systems: Components of system to be free from manufacturing and structural defects.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

067300 - 3

Leak-Proof Guarantee: Systems will not leak from joint seams in normal wet weather conditions when installed according to manufacturer guidelines

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Basis-of-Design Product - Composite Decking: The design for composite wood decking is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a compa-rable product.

Trex Select, Trex Company.

Basis-of-Design Product – Structural Deck Drainage System: The design for structural deck drainage systems is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named prod-uct or a comparable product.

Wahoo Decks – “DryJoist: 1604 Athens Hwy.; Gainesville, GA 30507; Toll Free Tel: 877-270-9387; Tel: 770-532-8411; Email: [email protected]; Web: www.wahoodecks.com

MATERIALS

Composite Wood:

Composition: Reclaimed wood and plastic with integral coloring; free from toxic chemicals and pre-servatives.

Profiles:

Decking: 2 x 6 inches nominal, 1.375 x 5.5 actual x maximum practical length.

Surface texture: Woodgrain

Color: As selected from Manufacturer’s complete range.

Characteristics:

Flame spread rating: 85, tested to ASTM E84.

Water absorption, 24 hour immersion, tested to ASTM D1037: 1.20%

Thermal expansion coefficient, 36 inch long samples:

1) Width: 42.7 x 10-6 (inch/inch/˚F.

2) Length: 19.2 x 10-6 (inch/inch/˚F..

Fastener withdrawal, tested to ASTM D1761:

Screw: 388 pounds per inch.

Modulus of rupture: 3750 PSI ultimate, 500 PSI design, tested to ASTM D4761.

Modulus of elasticity: 400,000 PSI ultimate, 200,000 PSI design, tested to ASTM D4761.

ACCESSORIES

Fasteners: stainless steel composite wood screws of length recommended by composite wood manufacturer for profile being fastened.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

067300 - 4

STRUCTURAL DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEMS (DRYJOIST)

Structural Deck Drainage Systems: DryJoist as manufactured by Wahoo Decks.

Compliance:

Aluminum: Meets specifications and guidelines for aluminum structures as recommended by AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1 and required by International Building Code (IBC).

Outdoor Exposure: Meets durability requirements of AAMA 2603.02.

Wind Lift: Minimum tested pull-out value of 2 inch (51 mm) long No. 12 DryJoist screw is 350 lb (158 kg).

Description: Interlocking design creates uninterrupted structural platform, with water collection/diversion feature on top and paint finished bead board ceiling on bottom; designed for attachment at 8 inches (203 mm), 16 inches (406 mm) or 24 inches (610 mm) on-center.

Materials: 6005-T5 Series Marine grade aluminum.

Finish: White powder coat finish, factory applied to visible side of profiles.

Construction: Extruded.

Assembly: Tongue and groove.

Allowable Span: 8 ft (2438 mm) maximum without frame support, perpendicular to ledgers.

Allowable Cantilever: Maximum allowable edge cantilever is 18 inches (453mm).

Modulus of Elasticity: 10,000,000 lbs/in2.

Second Moment of Inertia: 0.8076 in4.

Density: 0.09754 lbs/in3.

Minimum Aluminum Thickness at Attachment Points: 0.140 inches (3.56 mm)

Minimum Aluminum Yield Strength: 36,000 psi.

Minimum Fastener Width/Diameter: 0.211 inches (5.36 mm).

Minimum Fastener Width/Diameter: 0.25 inches (6.35 mm).

Weight:

By Length: 1.50 lb (0.68 kg) per linear ft (254 mm).

By Area: 2.25 lb (1 kg) per square ft ( 92903 mm2).

Drainage:

Integrated 2 inch (51 mm) deep water channels.

Pitch: Minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm) downward pitch per linear foot.

Flashing:

Flashing/Fascia on Rim Joists: Secure flashing along the entire length of Outer DryJoists.

Ledger Flashing: Two part flashing system; secure the first component of flashing prior to DryJoist install.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

067300 - 5

Overhangs: Provide optional 2 inch (51 mm) overhang beyond header joist on drainage side; de-signed to prevent backsplash.

Components:

Joists: DryJoists; flange edge and flange receiver edge to mate with other joists.

Available Widths: 8 inches and 4 inches. Profile Wall Thickness: Minimum of 0.70 inches (1.78 mm). Profile Depth: 2 inches (51 mm). Profile Lengths: As scheduled and indicated on Drawings.

Double Receivers: DryJoist Double Receivers; 'S profiles,' both sides have a 'Receiver' design.

Joint Covers: Locks together angles of neighboring joists; prevents water from entering ' Screw Chan-nels.'

Attachment: Do not pierce or compromise with fasteners.

Anchor Rails

Continuous Inside the water channels.'

Design: Permit ' Anchor Clips' to attach at any location within water channels, providing an addi-tional, secure area for fasteners without compromising waterproof design.

Anchor Clips: 6 inches (152 mm), 4 inches (102 mm) on center.

Fasteners/Attachment: No. 14 SS fasteners can be drilled through boards and directly into ' An-chor Clips'; eliminates need to penetrate water channel.

Outer/End Joists: Function as perimeter/outermost profiles.

Width: 4 inches (102 mm).

Design: Incorporates ' Flash Receiver' to secure either standard or pre-bent flashing; provides fin-ished appearance along Rim Joists or outer edges of deck.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install composite wood in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Cut, drill, and rout composite wood using carbide tipped blades.

Pre-drill fastener holes located closer than 1 inch from edges.

Cut ends square and true.

Do not use composite wood products as structural members.

Do not exceed maximum spans recommended by manufacturer.

Place boards perpendicular to supports.

Stagger end joints in adjacent rows at least one support.

Leave expansion spaces between abutting boards and between boards and adjacent construction:


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

067300 - 6

End gaps between boards: 1/8 inch at ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F and above and 3/16 inch at ambient temperatures below 60 degrees F.

Side gaps between boards: 1/4 inch at ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F and above and 3/8 inch at ambient temperatures below 60 degrees F.

Gaps between boards and adjacent construction: 1/4 inch at ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F and above and 1/2 inch at ambient temperatures below 60 degrees F.

Place boards to span three or more supports.

Fasten each board to each support with two fasteners.

Install structural deck drainage systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not walk on in-stallation until installation is complete and profiles have been secured to frame.


SECTION 072100 – THERMAL INSULATION EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072100 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product Data.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

INSULATION PRODUCTS

Glass Fiber Insulation: Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation - Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C, Category 1 ASTM E 96 Permeability: 1.0 Perm. Formaldehyde free.

Wall insulation: R-19 minimum. Roof insulation: R-30 minimum.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. Johns Manville. Knauf Fiber Glass. Owens Corning.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R-values indicated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.

Use expandable foam insulation or stuff unfaced glass-fiber insulation around window shim spaces and into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

PROTECTION

Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be con-cealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

All plastic insulation must be protected from interior occupancy space by an approved thermal barrier to meet the requirements of local Building Codes.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 072500 – WEATHER BARRIERS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072500 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Weather barrier membrane Seam Tape Flashing Fasteners

REFERENCES

ASTM International

ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials

AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test

TAPPI

Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) Test Method T-460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method)

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component.

Quality Assurance Submittals

Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Qualifications

Installer shall have experience with installation of similar weather barrier assemblies under similar con-ditions.

Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.


Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged con-tainers with identification labels intact.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072500 - 2

Store weather barrier materials as recommended by system manufacturer.

SCHEDULING

Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1-800-44-TYVEK (8-9835); http://construction.TYVEK.com

MATERIALS

Basis of Design – In Corrugated Metal Panel Assemblies: spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPont™ Tyvek® HomeWrap® and related assembly compo-nents.

Performance Characteristics:

Air Penetration: <.004 cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677.

Water Vapor Transmission: 56 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96-05, Method A.

Water Penetration Resistance: 250 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.

Basis Weight: 1.8 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410.

Air Resistance: 1200 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.

Tensile Strength: 30/30 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882.

Tear Resistance: 8/6 lbs, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117.

Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 15, Smoke Developed: 15

Basis of Design – In Stucco Assemblies: spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barri-er is based upon DuPont™ Tyvek® StuccoWrap® and related assembly components.

Performance Characteristics:

Air Penetration: 0.004 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677.

Water Vapor Transmission: 50 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.

Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 210 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.

Basis Weight: Minimum 2.1 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410.

Air Resistance: Air infiltration at 300 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072500 - 3

Tensile Strength: Minimum 30/30 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A.

Tear Resistance: 7/9 lbs, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117.

Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 5, Smoke Developed: 25

ACCESSORIES

Seam Tape: As recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer.

Fasteners:

DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners.

Sealants

Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions.

Products:

DuPont Weatherization Sealant Tremco 830 Tremco Butyl Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer.

Adhesive:

Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

Products:

Liquid Nails® LN-109 Polyglaze® SM 5700 Denso Butyl Liquid 3M High Strength 90 Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer.

Primer:

Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flash-ing.

Products:

3M High Strength 90 Denso Butyl Spray Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer.

Flashing

DuPont™ FlexWrap™, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: flexible membrane flashing materials for flanged window and door openings and penetrations.

DuPont™ StraightFlash™, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations, etc.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072500 - 4

DuPont™ StraightFlash™ VF, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: dual-sided, straight flashing membrane materials non-flanged doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

INSTALLATION – WEATHER BARRIER

General:

Apply building wrap immediately after sheathing is installed.

Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap.

Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level.

Extend bottom roll edge over sill plate interface 2” to 3” minimum. Seal weather barrier with sealant or tape. Shingle weather barrier over back edge of thru-wall flashings and seal weather barrier with seal-ant or tape. Ensure weeps are not blocked.

Subsequent layers shall overlap lower layers a minimum of 6 inches horizontally in a shingling manner.

Stucco Assemblies:

Apply stucco wrap with grooved surface pattern in vertical direction.

Shingle weather barrier over back edge of weep screed. Seal weather barrier with sealant or tape to weep screed. Ensure weeps are not blocked.

Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.

Weather Barrier Attachment:

Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, spaced 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on cen-ter, maximum horizontally.

Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ to weather barrier membrane prior to the installa-tion metal panel anchors.

SEAMING

Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams.

Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072500 - 5

OPENING PREPARATION (FOR USE WITH FLANGED WINDOWS)

Cut weather barrier membrane in a modified “I-cut” pattern.

Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header.

Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window opening.

Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and right corners of the opening.

Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten.

Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier membrane at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier membrane flap away from sheathing with tape.

FLASHING (FOR USE WITH FLANGED WINDOWS)

Cut 9-inch wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as recommended by the manufacturer.

Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough open-ing across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.

On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill.

Install window or door according to manufacturer’s instructions.

Apply 4-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing.

Apply 4-inch wide strip of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.

Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ Straight-Flash™ over the 45-degree seams.

Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instruc-tions and ASTM C1193.

OPENING PREPARATION (FOR USE WITH NON-FLANGED WINDOWS)

Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening.

Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheath-ing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

072500 - 6

FLASHING (FOR USE WITH NON-FLANGED WINDOWS - ALL CLADDING TYPES)

Cut flexible flashing a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening.

Cover horizontal sill by aligning flexible flashing edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

Fan flexible flashing at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.

Apply 9-inch wide strips of flashing at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start flash-ing at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill.

Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing.

Install flexible flashing at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flash-ing a minimum of 2 inches.

Coordinate flashing with window installation.

On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instruc-tions and ASTM C1193.

Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide flashing over the 45-degree seams.

Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealants per sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193.

PROTECTION

Protect installed weather barrier from damage.


SECTION 074113 – METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

074113 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Summary: Factory-formed metal roof panels and trim.


Special Warranty (Metal Roofing): Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: A form with five-year minimum experience installing specified products.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels through one source from a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Energy Performance of Roof Panels: Three-year, aged, solar reflectance not less than 0.55 and emissivity not less than 0.75, or aged, Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 64.

Wind-Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies: UL 580, Class 90.

METAL ROOF PANELS

General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

Metallic-Coated Steel Roof Panels: Fabricated from aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (Galvalume), ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 ((Class AZM150)).

Nominal Metal Thickness: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.86 mm)] [0.040 inch (01.02 mm)] [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)].

Rib Configuration: Sinusoidal.

Surface Finish: Acrylic coated Galvalume.

Minimum roof slope capability: 1:12.

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each metal roof panel specified is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

074113 - 2

Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation: 7/8” Corrugated Panel.

ACCESSORIES

Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, flashings, sealants, sealant tape and other gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match ma-terial and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated.

Closures: Provide closures at eaves and high eaves, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.

Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recom-mended by manufacturer.

Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather-tight construction.

Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, and fillers.

Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Ar-chitectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suita-ble fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of factory-applied coating.

Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels.

Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.

PART 3 - EXECUTION After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.

METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

General: Install panels per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof pan-els and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural move-ment. Where replacing existing that have obsolete penetration panels, replace entire panel from eave to ridge.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

074113 - 3

Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.

Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expan-sion and contraction. Predrill panels.

Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge caps.

Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all open-ings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.

Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

Fasteners:

Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt un-derlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof pan-el manufacturer.

Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weather-proof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

Provide metal-backed neoprene or EPDM washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels.

Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equip-ment, vents, and accessories.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

074113 - 4

Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of corrugated nesting-type; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weatherproof to driving rains.

At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (150-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, flashings, seal-ants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or in-tersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be suffi-ciently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


SECTION 075113 – BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

Section Includes

Asphaltic modified bituminous roofing

REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Annual Book of ASTM Standards

ASTM D-4601 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing

ASTM D-5147 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material

ASTM D-3909 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced With Mineral Granules

ASTM C-1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Tempera-ture Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer

ASTM C-1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temper-ature Using Portable Emissometers

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)

American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

Factory Mutual (FM Global) - Approval Guide

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Roofing Systems and Materials Guide

DEFINITIONS

Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and the glossary of the National Roofing Contractors Associa-tion (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for definitions of roofing terms related to this section.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Provide product data sheets for each type of product indicated in this section.

Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturers standard details and approved shop drawings for the roof system specified.

Samples: Provide samples, fasteners, membrane materials and accessories for verification of quality.

Certificates: Installer shall provide written documentation from the manufacturer of their authorization to install the roof system, and eligibility to obtain the warranty specified in this section.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 2

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer’s Qualifications: GAF® shall provide a roofing system that meets or exceeds all criteria listed in this section.

Installer’s Qualifications:

Installer shall be classified as an Authorized contractor as defined and certified by GAF®.

Source Limitations: All components listed in this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer or ap-proved by the primary roofing manufacturer.

Final Inspection

Manufacturer’s representative shall provide a comprehensive final inspection after completion of the roof system. All application errors must be addressed and final punch list completed.

PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

Prior to scheduled commencement of the roofing installation and associated work, conduct a meeting at the project site with the installer, architect, owner, GAF® representative and any other persons directly involved with the performance of the work. The installer shall record conference discussions to include decisions and agreements reached (or disagreements), and furnish copies of recorded discussions to each attending par-ty. The main purpose of this meeting is to review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work.


Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does not permit the passage of water, and will withstand the design pressures calculated in accordance with the most current revision of ASCE 7.

GAF® shall provide all primary roofing materials that are physically and chemically compatible when in-stalled in accordance with manufacturers current application requirements.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

All work shall be performed in a safe, professional manner, conforming to all federal, state and local codes.

Exterior Fire Test Exposure: Provide a roofing system that will achieve an Underwriters Laboratories rating for roof slopes indicated.

UL Class C

Windstorm Classification: Provide a roofing system which will achieve a Factory Mutual wind uplift rating, as listed in the current FM Approval Guide.

1-90


Deliver all roofing materials to the site in original containers, with factory seals intact.

Store roll goods on end on pallets in a clean, dry, protected area. Take care to prevent damage to roll ends or edges. Do not double stack modified bitumen products.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 3

Materials shall be stored above 55°F (12.6°C) a minimum of 24 hours prior to application.

Store all pail goods in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry location within their specified temperature range. Reference data sheets for product storage requirements.

Do not expose materials to moisture in any form before, during or after delivery to the site. Reject delivery of materials that show evidence of contact with moisture.

Remove manufacturer supplied plastic covers from materials provided with such. Use “breathable” type covers such as canvas tarpaulins to allow venting and protection from weather and moisture. Cover and protect materials at the end of each work day. Do not remove any protective tarpaulins until immediately before the material will be installed.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Weather

Proceed with roofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.

Ambient temperatures must be above 45°F (7.2°C) when applying hot asphalt or water based adhe-sives.

WARRANTY

Roofing Contractor’s Warranty: Roofing Contractor’s standard form, without monetary limitation, in which Roofing Contractor agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or work-manship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

Warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories fasteners and other components of roofing system.

Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufac-turer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

Warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, fasteners and other components of roofing system.

Warranty Period: 10 years minimum from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roofing systems as manufactured by one of the following:

Basis of Design - GAF Materials Corporation. CertainTeed Corporation. Firestone Building Products Company. Johns Manville International, Inc.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 4

BASE SHEETS

Heavyweight asphalt coated glass fiber base sheet: Conforms to or exceeds requirements of ASTM D 4601, Type II, UL Type G2 BUR, and Federal Spec SS-R-620B Type II.

GAFGLAS #75 base sheet.

MEMBRANE MATERIALS

Membrane Ply Sheets: Glass fiber asphalt saturated ply sheet, strong and lightweight. Conforms to or ex-ceeds requirements of ASTM D 2178 Type IV and UL Type G1 BUR.

GAFGLAS Ply 4

Cap Sheet: Coated extra fine mineral granule surfaced built up roofing membrane containing a core of non-woven polyester mat coated with fire retardant APP polymer modified asphalt designed for heat weld application. Conforms to or exceeds requirements of ASTM D3909.

GAFGLAS EnergyCap BUR Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet

FLASHING MATERIALS

Heavyweight asphalt coated glass fiber base sheet: Conforms to or exceeds requirements of ASTM D 4601, Type II, UL Type G2 BUR, and Federal Spec SS-R-620B Type II.

GAFGLAS #75 base sheet.

Glass fiber asphalt saturated ply sheet, strong and lightweight. Conforms to or exceeds requirements of ASTM D 2178 Type IV and UL Type G1 BUR Each roll contains five (5) squares (530 sq. ft.) of material, approximately 39.4” x 161.8’ (1.0m x 49.3m),

GAFGLAS Ply 4.

ENERGY STAR listed, coated extra fine mineral granule surfaced built up roofing membrane containing a core of non-woven polyester mat coated with fire retardant APP polymer modified asphalt designed for heat weld application. Conforms to or exceeds requirements of ASTM D3909. Each roll contains one square of material, approximately 39.6” x 32.6’ (1 m x 9.9 m),

GAFGLAS EnergyCap BUR Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet

BITUMEN / ADHESIVES

Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312 Type III or IV

SBS Cement: ASTM D4586, TOPCOAT Matrix 202 SBS Flashing Cement, by GAF®®.

Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, TOPCOAT Matrix 203 Plastic Roof Cement, by GAF®®.

Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41

TOPCOAT Matrix 307 Premium Asphalt Primer, by GAF®®

PLATES & FASTENERS

Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 5

Drill•Tec Standard Screws.

NAILS & SPIKES

Threaded Cap Nail: Annular-threaded electro-galvanized with yellow di-chromate coating, with 1” (25 mm) round or square cap

Simplex Nail Corporation or as otherwise acceptable to the roofing manufacturer.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compati-ble with built-up roofing.

Cant Strip: Factory fabricated rigid perlite strip cut at angles to provide a true 45 Angle between horizon-tal and vertical surfaces

EnergyGuard Perlite Cant Strip, by GAF®

Tapered Edge Strip: Factory fabricated rigid perlite strip cut at angles to provide a smooth transition be-tween differences in elevation.

EnergyGuard Tapered Edge Strip, by GAF®

Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufac-turer.

PENETRATION ACCESSORIES

Vent Flashing: A spun aluminum vent, pre-flashed with SBS or APP modified bitumen membrane designed to waterproof soil pipes and roofing protrusions.

The M-Vent Standard, by GAF®.

A two-piece roof-flashing unit consisting of a pre-flashed SBS or APP modified bitumen membrane spun aluminum base and a flexible upper boot.

The M-Vent Adjustable, by GAF®.

A Pre-flashed metal through-parapet roof drain scupper designed for easy installation to aid in quick lateral removal of water.

The M-Scupper, by GAF®.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Verify that the surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

Verify that the deck is supported and secured.

Verify that the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped to drains, valleys, eaves, scuppers or gutters.

Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of ice or snow.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 6

Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set, and that all flashings are ta-pered.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

Plywood Deck

Plywood sheathing must be exterior grade, minimum 4 ply, and not less than 15/32” (12 mm) thick.

The deck must be installed over joists that are spaced 24” (61 cm) o.c. or less.

The deck must be installed so that all four sides of each panel bear on and are secured to joist and cross blocking. “H” clips are not acceptable.

Panels must be installed with a 1/8” to 1/4” (3mm – 6mm) gap between panels and must match verti-cally at joints to within 1/8” (3mm).

Decking should be kept dry and roofed promptly after installation.

INSTALLATION - GENERAL

Install roofing system according to all current application requirements in addition to those listed in this sec-tion.

GAF® GAFGLAS® Specification #: N-B-4-MEC

Start the application of membrane plies at the low point of the roof or at the drains, so that the flow of wa-ter is over or parallel to, but never against the laps.

BITUMEN HANDLING

Do not mix different types of asphalt.

Use only ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV Steep Asphalt. Type III asphalt may be used on slopes up to ½” per foot (4cm/m). Type IV asphalt must be used on all slopes greater than ½” per foot (4 cm/m).

Application with hot asphalt requires continuous, uniform interply mopping rates of 25 lbs. +/- 20% per 100 square feet of roof area (1.2 kg/m²). rates up to 60lbs per 100 sq.ft may be required if the substrate surface is rough or porous.

Application temperature of the asphalt must be at the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) with a tolerance of +/- 25°F (13.9°C), at which a viscosity of 125 centipoise is attained. When using mechanical asphalt applica-tors, the target viscosity should be 75 centipoise.

For all SBS modified asphalt flashings; the minimum application temperature of the asphalt must be at the EVT temperature, typically between 425°F and 475oF, whichever is greater, with a rolling bank (puddle) of mopping asphalt across the full width of the roll.

Do not heat the asphalt to or above its flash point or hold the asphalt at temperatures above the finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours.

Do not keep heated tankers above 325°F (163°C) overnight.

BASE SHEET

Roll the base sheet out over the substrate and allow it to relax. Lap the base sheet so the flow of water is over or parallel to, but never against the laps.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 7

Lap the base sheet 2” (5.1 cm), and 4” (10.2 cm) on the ends, with adjacent laps a minimum of 18” (45.7 cm) apart. Keeping the base sheet taut, push out all wrinkles and buckles ahead as fastening proceeds.

Turn base sheet up to the top of the cant. Install over all combustible walls and curbs.

At edge terminations, turn the membrane down the face of the wall 2” and fasten every 6” o.c. with ap-propriate fasteners.

Provide a minimum FMRC 1-90 attachment. Refer to FMRC Approval Guide for FM Fastening patterns. Fac-tory. Refer to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-7, 1-28, 1-29 and 1-49.

Note: When fastening base sheets using screws and plates without insulation, the plate must be of a design that allows it to lie flat on the deck.

INTERPLY SHEETS

Four-ply application: Install starter strips of 9 7/8” (25.1 cm), 19 11/16” (50 cm), 29 1/2” (74.9 cm) and 39 3/8” (100.0 cm) widths and follow with a second full 39 3/8” (100.0 cm) width sheet with a maxi-mum 7 7/8” (20 cm) exposure, applied shingle style. Lap felts 30 1/16” (76.4 cm) with a 9 5/16” (23.6 cm) exposure and lap 6” (15.2 cm) at ends. Stagger adjacent end laps a minimum of 18” (45.7 cm).

CAP SHEET

Begin the application of the Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet at the low points of the roof so that the flow of water is never against the laps. Parallel lap lines of cap sheet should not coincide with the lap lines of the underlying plies wherever possible. Application must be over and parallel to the underlying roofing mem-brane.

Mineral Surface Cap sheet shall not be installed in full-length rolls. It must be cut into shorter lengths, stacked and relaxed prior to installation. If the ambient temperature is 65° F, or above, the roll can be cut in lengths up to 18 feet. If the temperature is below 65° F, the roll must be cut in lengths no greater than 12 feet. Failure to cut and relax the cap sheet prior to installation may result in wrinkles, ridges and fishmouths.

Embed the cap sheet in steep roofing asphalt applied at the nominal rate of 25 pounds per 100 square feet. Side laps must be a minimum of 2 inches and end laps a minimum of 6 inches. End laps must be staggered by a minimum of 3 feet. Uniformity of the separation of side laps is desirable for best appear-ance. All sheets must be free of wrinkles, buckles, blisters, fishmouths, or voids. End laps must be nailed on all slopes exceeding 1 inch per foot.

There are three acceptable methods of application:

The "flop in" method involves setting the precut sheet with mineral surfaced side down adjacent to the area where it is to be applied with the lap of the previous course exposed. Solidly mop with roofing asphalt the full sheet width to be covered including the lap. The GAFGLAS EnergyCap Mineral Sur-faced Cap Sheet shall be picked up at each end and at the outside edge, turned over, and set immedi-ately into the hot mopping.

The "fly in" method involves mopping the full width of the area to be covered and then picking up a precut sheet and setting it immediately into the hot mopping.

The "re-roll" method involves setting the precut sheet so it is in its exact final position, re-rolling it, and then mopping immediately ahead of the roll as it is rolled in place.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 8

Brooming of the GAFGLAS EnergyCap Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet should be performed to ensure com-plete adhesion. When implementing the in the "flop in" and "fly in" methods, tension should be placed on the precut sheet as it is being set to avoid wrinkles or buckles in the sheet.

If damage by other trades or any inadvertent damage should occur to the EnergyCap™ product during in-stallation, and for aesthetic purposes only, an additional fog coat of EnergyCote™ coating can be applied to the sheet at a rate of ½ to 1 gallon per 100 sq ft

BITUMINOUS BASE FLASHINGS

Install base flashing over all cant strips, horizontal to vertical transitions, roof edges and roof penetrations. Flashings are to be secured in accordance with current manufacturer’s application guidelines.

Nailable curbs and walls must be covered with a layer of manufacturer’s approved base sheet fastened 8” (20.3 cm) o.c. in all directions with approved fasteners. All vertical laps shall be 4” (10.2 cm). Base sheet or backer ply must extend out onto the field of the roof as shown in the manufacturer’s applicable construc-tion detail.

Prime all metal surfaces with asphalt primer, and allow adequate drying time prior to adhering flashing plies.

The finished ply of base flashing shall be run vertically to provide a selvage edge that will aid in achieving proper adhesion at the 3” (7.6 cm) vertical laps. If the sheet is run horizontally, the vertical laps must be a minimum of 6” (15.2 cm) and the selvage edge must be removed from the sheet or fully covered by the counterflashing. The finished flashing ply must extend out onto the field of the roof as shown in the appli-cable manufacturer’s construction detail, and must be extended a minimum of 4” (10.2 cm) beyond the edge of the prior flashing plies. The flashing must be soundly adhered to the parapet, cant area and roof surface to result in a minimum void, non-bridging construction.

Base flashing heights must be a minimum of 8” (20.3 cm) and a maximum of 24” (61.0 cm) above the roofline.

Use only Type III or Type IV hot asphalt. Maintain asphalt at the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) +/- 25ºF (13.9ºC) for all base and ply sheets used in flashing details. Apply flashing membranes at the EVT temper-ature or 425ºF (218ºC) whichever is greater. Firmly press sheets into the adhesive, and immediately nail the top of the flashing as specified in the appropriate flashing detail.

Corner membrane flashings, such as “bow ties” for outside corners and “footballs” for inside corners or other membrane reinforcements are required to ensure that base flashing corners are sealed at cant areas. An alternate method of corner reinforcing is to install a smooth MB membrane reinforcement piece on the prepared corner substrate prior to final surfacing membrane. Refer to MB Flashing Details section of the GAF® Application and Specifications Manual.

SHEET METAL

Metal should not be used as a component of base flashing. Because of the high coefficient of expansion of sheet metals and the large temperature changes that can be experienced on a roof, sheet metal or exposed metal components must be isolated from the waterproofing components of the roofing and flashing system as efficiently as possible to prevent the metal from splitting the membranes.

All metal edge details scheduled to be included in the manufacturer’s warranty must be submitted and ap-proved in writing by the manufacturer prior to project commencement.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

075113 - 9

SHEET METAL

When it is unavoidable to use metal in the roofing system (i.e., fascias) and treated wood nailers, 1” (25 mm) wider than the metal flange, should be provided for metal flange attachment. Metal flanges must al-ways be set on top of the roof membrane with modified trowel grade cold adhesive applied material for SBS roof systems. The metal flange is then sealed using the applicable construction detail to meet applica-ble guarantee requirements. Metal accessories (fascias, counter flashing, etc.) should be 24 gauge (0.71 mm) galvanized. See Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for additional information.

Fabricate and install all sheet metal materials as shown in applicable construction details. Refer to SMAC-NA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.) for guidance on sheet metal treatments not addressed in this specification.

Clean metal and apply asphalt primer to all sheet metal surfaces that will come into contact with asphalt or other bituminous materials; allow the primer adequate time to dry.

Use fastener types compatible with the sheet metal type.

Galvanized steel: use galvanized or cadmium-plated sheet fasteners.

Stacks shall have metal sleeve flashing a minimum of 8” (20.3 cm) high.

Conduits and piping such as electrical and gas lines must be set on wood blocking or some other form of support. Wood blocking/supports must be set on pads constructed of an additional layer of roof mem-brane material.

ROOF PROTECTION

Protect all partially and fully completed roofing work from other trades until completion.

Whenever possible, stage materials in such a manner that foot traffic is minimized over completed roof ar-eas.

When it is not possible to stage materials away from locations where partial or complete installation has taken place, temporary walkways and platforms shall be installed in order to protect all completed roof ar-eas from traffic and point loading during the application process.

Temporary tie-ins shall be installed at the end of each workday and removed prior to commencement of work the following day.

CLEAN-UP

All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times.

Do not allow trash, waste, or debris to collect on the roof. These items shall be removed from the roof on a daily basis.

All tools and unused materials must be collected at the end of each workday and stored properly off of the finished roof surface and protected from exposure to the elements.

Dispose of or recycle all trash and excess material in a manner conforming to current EPA regulations and local laws.

Properly clean the finished roof surface after completion, and make sure the drains and gutters are not clogged.

Clean and restore all damaged surfaces to their original condition. END OF SECTION 075113


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 076200 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

076200 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:

Roof drainage systems Manufactured receivers and counterflashing. Roof flashing and trim. Field or shop formed wall flashing and trim. Parapet Vents. Copings


General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally in-duced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.

SUBMITTALS

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Speci-fication Sections.

Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general rec-ommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.

Shop Drawings for exposed flashing showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details.

Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish.

8-inch- (200-mm-) square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

Standards:

Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Comply with The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual installation details.

FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

076200 - 2

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each instal-lation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

METALS

Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275), or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); 0.028-inch (0.71-mm), 24 gauge minimum nominal thickness.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum.

Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners.

Fasteners for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel or Series 300 stainless steel.

Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no as

Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.

Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as re-quired for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

FABRICATION, GENERAL

Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in water-proof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.

Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of inter-


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

076200 - 3

meshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at loca-tions of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.

Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.

ACCESSORIES

Two piece fascia system with continuous anchor cleat and exterior fascia cover available in 10 foot lengths.

Basis of design: M-Weld Gravel Stop MB Fascia by GAF®

Color: Galvanized finish.

Metal coping cap with galvanized steel anchor cleats and gutter support chairs available in 10 foot lengths.

Basis of design: M-Weld Snap-On Coping by GAF®. 24 gauge galvanized steel coping cap. 20 gauge galvanized steel coping cleat. Provide fabricated miters and end caps

Color: Galvanized finish.

Counterflashing: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate receiver and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded corners and junctions.

Material: Galvanized steel, 24 gage.

Metal counter-flashing shall have a minimum 4” (10.2 cm) face with a drip lip. The bottom edge of the counterflashing shall cover the roofing membrane and/or base flashing by a minimum of 4” (10.2 cm). Metal counter flashing used for wooden walls, or through wall metal flashings should be a two piece design to allow for installation and later removal. End joints shall be lapped 3” (7.6 cm) or more. Adequate fasteners must be provided to secure against wind forces. Skirt fasteners shall be watertight.

Conductor Heads: Formed from 24 gage thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with out-let tubes. Field fabricated outlets are not permitted.

Downspouts at Conductor Heads: Formed from 24 gage thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. Fabri-cate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same mate-rial as downspouts, and anchors.

Gutters: Formed from 26 gage thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 6” half-round profile indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Install in longest lengths pos-sible with fewest seams and fabricated according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Fur-


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

076200 - 4

nish gutter supports spaced 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Field fabricat-ed outlets are not permitted.

Downspouts at gutters: Formed from 26 ga., zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; in longest length possible with the fewest seams with formed elbows and offsets. Provide 4” round corrugated down-spouts.

Precast Concrete Splashblocks: Nominal 12” x 30” fiber-mesh reinforced concrete splashblock shaped to divert water away from foundation. Buff, beige or tan color as selected from manufacturer’s standard col-ors.

Parapet Vent: One piece, hooded aluminum vent with horizontal louvers.

Basis of design: Active Ventilation Products, Inc.

Universal Vent, Model Unit UV-75, Free area: 0.521 in./sq.ft.

Color: As selected from manufacturer’s complete range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance re-quirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant.

Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints.

Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

076200 - 5

Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed sur-faces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by man-ufacturer.

Underlayment: Where installing aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.

Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

Metal flanges for fascias to be used in conjunction with roofing shall be primed (both sides), set in modified trowel grade roofing cement. Flanges shall be a minimum of 3 1/2” (8.9 cm) wide for gravel stops. The gravel stop lip should be at least 3/4” (19 mm) high. Provisions must be made for securing the skirt to the face of the wall. In all cases, fascia and eave strip nailer should be fastened to the deck or deck system with adequate resistance against wind forces.

Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and an-chors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner.

Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold down-spouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during con-struction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Com-pletion.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 078413 – THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

078413 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product Data and Installer certificates signed by Installer certifying that products have been in-stalled in compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

Hilti, Inc. Johns Manville. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. USG Corporation.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

Provide penetration firestopping materials that are compatible with one another, substrates, and penetrating items if any.

Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

F-Rating at Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Not less than that of construction penetrated. F-Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than that of construction penetrated. T-Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of construc-tion penetrated except for penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill ma-terials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfac-es adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seek-ing to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Include the following information on labels:

SECTION 078413 – THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

078413 - 2

The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Manufacturer's name. Installer's name.


SECTION 079200 – JOINT SEALANT EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

079200 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.

Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

Do not apply sealant to wet substrates.

Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.


Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant contin-uous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.

MATERIALS, GENERAL

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the follow-ing limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

Sealants: 250 g/L.

Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

079200 - 2

ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: For vertical joints exposed to view where normal movement is anticipated.

Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). Class: 100/50. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

Sika Corporation: Sikaflex – 15 LM.

Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: For horizontal surface joints such as concrete paving joints, slab/wall junctions, and similar conditions. Not for vehicle traffic areas.

Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). Class: 25 or 50. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).

Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 1CSL.

Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant (For Interior Use in Sanitary Areas):

Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). Class: 25. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, O.

LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

Latex Sealant (Painter’s Caulk): For Interior Vertical and Overhead Joints with Minimal Movement. Door and window perimeter:

Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. Paintable.

Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. ALEX Painters Caulk; DAP Products Inc. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. Tremflex 834; Tremco.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

079200 - 3

ACRYLIC BASED JOINT SEALANTS

Interior Joints at Countertops: Provide the following for sealing interior joints around countertops.

Phenoseal Laminate Perimeter Sealant, Phenomenal Brands, Phenoseal Products.

ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints (For Joints in Walls and Ceilings with acoustic insula-tion.

Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:

Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in build-ing construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


Provide sealant backings of materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for pre-venting sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Pro-vide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PREPARATION

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, in-cluding dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhe-sion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates in-clude the following:

Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

079200 - 4

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applica-tions indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal perimeters, con-trol joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical seal-ant at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919.

Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor seal-ants or adjacent surfaces.

Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

079200 - 5

CLEANING

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

PROTECTION

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECT

ION

0800

00 -

DOOR

SCH

EDUL

EEU

NIC

E 16

APA

RTM

ENTS

EUN

ICE

N

EW M

EXIC

O

No.

Loca

tion

Doo

r

Fra

me

Deta

ilsHa

rdw

are

Rem

arks

Eleva

tion

Pane

l Wid

thPa

nel H

eight

Thick

ness

Mat

eria

lFin

ishEle

vatio

nGa

geM

ater

ial

Finish

Head

Jam

bSi

llSe

t No.

Glaz

ing

1 B

edro

om

101A

Entra

nce

D13'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/4”

Fiber

glass

Paint

Wood

Paint

5E/A

3.3

5D/A

3.3

5A-5

B/A3

.31

101B

Living

/Dini

ngD2

4'-0

" (2)

6'-1

0 3/

8"-

Vinyl/

Wood

Facto

ryVin

yl/Wo

odFa

ctory

3E/A

3.2

3D/A

3.2

3A-3

B/A3

.2-

Per S

pec

Verti

cal L

ouve

r Blin

d

103A

Close

tD5

2'-4

" (2)

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2B/A

5.2

1B/A

5.2

610

4AMe

chan

ical

D32'

-0" (

2)

6'-8

"1-

3/4”

Fiber

glass

Paint

Wood

Paint

5E/A

3.3

5D/A

3.3

5A-5

B/A3

.32

105A

Bath

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

410

7AClo

set

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

510

8ABe

droo

m 1

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

410

9AClo

set

D52'

-4" (

2)

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2B/A

5.2

1B/A

5.2

6

2 Be

droo

m20

1AEn

tranc

eD1

3'-0

”6'

-8"

1-3/

4”Fib

ergla

ssPa

intWo

odPa

int5E

/A3.

35D

/A3.

35A

-5B/

A3.3

120

1BLiv

ing/D

ining

D24'

-0" (

2)6'

-10

3/8"

-Vin

yl/Wo

odFa

ctory

Vinyl/

Wood

Facto

ry3E

/A3.

23D

/A3.

23A

-3B/

A3.2

-Pe

r Spe

cVe

rtica

l Lou

ver B

lind

203A

Close

tD5

2'-4

" (2)

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2B/A

5.2

1B/A

5.2

620

4AMe

chan

ical

D32'

-0" (

2)

6'-8

"1-

3/4”

Fiber

glass

Paint

Wood

Paint

5E/A

3.3

5D/A

3.3

5A-5

B/A3

.32

204C

Mech

anica

l (Sp

rinkle

rD1

3'-0

”6'

-8"

1-3/

4”Fib

ergla

ssPa

intWo

odPa

int5E

/A3.

35D

/A3.

35A

/A3.

33

205A

Bath

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

420

7AClo

set

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

520

8ABe

droo

m 1

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

420

9AClo

set

D52'

-4" (

2)

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2B/A

5.2

1B/A

5.2

621

0ABe

droo

m 2

D43'

-0”

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2A/A

5.2

1A/A

5.2

421

1AClo

set

D52'

-4" (

2)

6'-8

"1-

3/8"

H.C.

Wood

Paint

Wood

Paint

2B/A

5.2

1B/A

5.2

6

10

AU

GU

ST 2

015

080000 -

1


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 081416 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081416 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY

This Section includes the following:

Hollow core doors with hardboard faces. Shop priming flush wood doors. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

Package doors individually in plastic bags, cardboard cartons or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS


Flush Wood Doors: Four panel.

Classics “Molded Panel Series”, Masonite Corporation, Chicago, Il.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081416 - 2

DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.

Hollow Core Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements:

Faces: Molded four panel hardboard, smooth surface. Core: Standard hollow core.

Door Frame: Primed, finger jointed wood jamb with single rabetted profile indicated. Hinge jamb prepara-tions for 1-3/8” thick doors to be machined for standard weight radius mortise 3-1/2" hinges. Strike jamb preparations are to be machined for full lip cylindrical strike plate.

Provide shop prehung door to the extent possible.

Hinges: Provide (3) standard weight radius mortise hinges per door panel. Satin chrome; US26D finish.

FABRICATION

Fabricate doors and frames in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.

Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:

Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting.

Machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

SHOP PRIMING

Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

Reject doors with defects.


INSTALLATION

Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, refer-enced quality standard, and as indicated.

Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081416 - 3

ADJUSTING

Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be re-paired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 081600 – GLIDING PATIO DOORS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081600 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

Gliding Patio Doors.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Performance Requirements: Provide products/systems that have been manufactured, fabricated, and in-stalled to the following performance criteria:

Comply with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.

Performance Class and Grade: LC-PG25 size tested 96”x96”

U-Factor (NFRC 100): .29

Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) (NFRC 200): 21

Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) (ASTM E90): 23

Sound Transmission Class (STC) (ASTM E90): 29

Structural Requirements: Provide products/systems capable of withstanding wind loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Structural Load Test:

Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Product from basic wind speed indi-cated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 meters) above grade, according to ASCE, Section 6, based upon mean roof heights indicated on Drawings.

Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.

Importance Factor: IW=1.0

Exposure Category: C

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation guides.

Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating direction of operable parts, typical jamb, head and sill condi-tions, and special mullion reinforcement details.

Color Samples: Submit selection and verification samples, including the following:

Hardware: Submit samples indicating typical finish on window hardware.

Cladding: Submit color Samples of vinyl cladding.

Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

Performance Data: Provide manufacturer’s published performance data for specified products.

Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081600 - 2

Warranty documents specified herein.

Owner’s Manual: Bound manual clearly identified with project name, location, and completion date. Identify type and size of units installed. Provide recommendations for periodic inspections, care, and maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary repair.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

Certifications:

Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with certification label of Insu-lating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) indicating compliance.

Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with certification label of Insu-lating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada (IGMAC) indicating compliance with CAN/CGSB or ASTM E2190.


Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

Store materials and accessories off ground, under cover, and protected from weather and construction ac-tivities.

PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. Record measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construc-tion progress to avoid construction delays.

Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s safety and weather requirements.

WARRANTY

Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard limited warranty doc-ument. Manufacturer’s limited warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

Provide products from the following manufacturer:

Andersen Windows, Inc.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081600 - 3

100 4th Ave. N.

Bayport, MN 55003-1096.

Phone: (800) 299-9029.

Fax: (800) 752-9230.

E-mail: [email protected].

www.andersenwindows.com.

MANUFACTURED UNITS

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Andersen® 200 Series Perma-Shield® Gliding Patio Doors.

Substitution Limitations: All other manufacturers: Submit substitution request in accordance with Section 01 25 00 - "Substitution Procedures".

MATERIALS

Wood Members: Fabricated from wood species approved in WDMA I.S.4.

Vinyl Cladding: Rigid vinyl (PVC) complying with the requirements of ASTM D4216, in the following color:

Color: White.

Weatherstripping:

Head and Jambs: Provide flexible vinyl at head and operating and fixed side jambs.

Sill Weatherstripping: Provide polypropylene pile with fin seal at sill of operating panel.

Meeting Stiles: Polyethylene wrapped urethane foam weatherstrip on the stationary panel and combi-nation PVC weatherstrip on operating panel meeting stile.

GLAZING

General: Tempered insulating glass units certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council and conforming to the requirements of ASTM E2190. Provide dual sealed units consisting of polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Provide metal spacers with bent or soldered corners.

Low-E Sun Glass, Low SHGC, Argon Blend Filled Insulating Glass Units:

Glass: Tempered insulating glass units consisting of an outboard and inboard lite of clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1, q3, Kind FT.

Low-E Glass Coating: Magnetron sputtering vapor deposition (MSVD) Low-E coating applied to the No. 2 surface.

Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon gas blend.

Protective removable polyolefin film applied to glass surfaces No. 1 and No. 4.

HARDWARE

Roller Assembly: Provide operating panels with adjustable roller assembly consisting of self-lubricating tan-dem wheels operating on ball bearings. Provide 2-tandem rollers for each operating panel.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081600 - 4

Locks: Brass thumb turn operated stainless steel reach–out hook bolt locking mechanism. Design lock to prevent automatic locking when door is closed.

Provide blank cover at exterior.

Hardware Styles: Provide the following hardware where indicated:

Tribeca® Hardware: Cast zinc dichromate thumb turn and lever handle trim with powder coated painted finish in the following color:

Color: White.

ACCESSORIES

Perma-Clean® Gliding Insect Screens: Provide gliding patio doors with gliding insect screen installed on exterior.

Insect Screen Door Frame: 0.040 inch (1 mm) roll formed aluminum frame with chromate conversion coating in the following polyester painted color.

Color: White.

Insect Screen Cloth: 18 by 16 glass fiber mesh, charcoal color finish.

Rollers: Insect screen doors operate on injection molded bottom rollers with self contained leveling ad-justers engaged in sill track.

Operating Handles: Polycarbonate operating handles to receive locking mechanism in the following color.

Color: White.

Perma-Clean® Retractable Insect Screens at ramp sills only: Provide gliding patio doors with retractable insect screen installed on exterior.

Insect Screen Door Housing: Extruded aluminum housing in the following color.

Color: White.

Insect Screen Cloth: 18 by 16 glass fiber mesh, charcoal color finish.

Sill Support: Clear anodized aluminum extrusion.

Threshold: Threshold fabricated from the following species:

Species: Oak or Maple.

Ramped Sill Insert: Provide ramped sill insert consisting of the following components:

Interior Ramp: Finger joined material from the following species:

Species: Oak or Maple.

Center Sill Insert: Extruded aluminum profile with gray painted finish.

Exterior Ramp: 2-piece extruded aluminum ramp with gray painted finish.

FABRICATION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081600 - 5

Preservative Treatment: Treat wood frame members and interior glazing stops after machining with a water repellent preservative in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.

Frame Components: Completely encase frame members with rigid vinyl extrusions.

Door Stiles and Rails: Completely encase door stiles and rails with seamless, rigid vinyl extrusions. Heat weld corners.

Sill: 0.062 inch (1.57 mm) thick zinc chromate and painted aluminum extrusion separated by structural PVC thermal barrier located to provide maximum resistance to thermal conductivity. Protect operating door track with stainless steel cap.

Weatherstripping: Factory apply weatherstripping to unit frame. Field apply interlocking weatherstripping at panel meeting stiles.

Glazing: Factory glaze with high quality glazing sealant and wood interior trim stops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Comply with the instructions and recommendations of unit manufacturer.

EXAMINATION

Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of units, including the following:

Concrete surfaces are dry and free of excess mortar, rocks, sand, and other construction debris.

Rough openings are square and dimensions are correct.

Sill plates are level.

Wood frame walls are dry, clean, sound, and well nailed or glued, free of voids and without offsets at joints.

Nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in openings and within 3 inches (75 mm) of rough opening.

Do not proceed with installation of units until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

INSTALLATION

General:

Remove unit components, parts, accessories, and installation guides from carton.

Inspect unit components and verify that components are not damaged and that parts are included be-fore disposing of carton.

Field assemble multiple units before installation in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guides.

Interface With Other Work:

Perform installation in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

Install units plumb, level, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081600 - 6

Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

Install insulation in shim space around unit perimeter to maintain continuity of building insulation. Do not overfill.

Hold back exterior siding or other finish materials from edge of unit to allow for expansion and contrac-tion and installation of proper joint sealant with backing materials. Seal perimeter of unit after exterior finish is applied per requirements of Division 07 “Joint Sealants” Section.

Finish interior units per requirements specified in related sections. Refer to, and comply with, additional requirements in manufacturer’s installation guides.

Install optional hardware and unit accessories after cleaning.

Site Tolerances:

Adjust operation, insect screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weath-erstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

CLEANING

Clean units using cleaning material and methods specifically recommended by window manufacturer.

Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes.

Protect unit surfaces from masonry cleaning solution that could damage insulation glass panels or hard-ware.

Remove debris from work site and properly dispose of debris.

PROTECTION

Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.


SECTION 081613 – FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081613 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Fiberglass Entry Doors


Door Unit Air Leakage, NFRC 400, 1.57 psf (25 mph): 0.50 cfm per square foot of frame or less.

Door Unit Water Penetration: No water penetration through door unit when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331or ASTM E 547 with water applied at rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot at 0 psf.

Doors shall qualify for Energy Star Rating.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit door manufacturer current product literature, including installation instructions.

Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating dimensions, construction, component connections, anchorage methods and locations, accessories, hardware locations, and installation details.

WARRANTY

Therma-Tru® standard limited warranty for fiberglass Therma-Tru® Door Product and genuine Therma-Tru® components, including rot-resistant brickmould sourced from Therma-Tru used in commercial and multi-residential projects will be free from material and workmanship defects for a period of three years subject to certain limitations and restrictions

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

Basis of design:

Therma-Tru Corp. 1750 Indian Wood Circle Maumee, OH 43537 (419) 891-7400 (800) 843-7628 www.thermatru.com Contact: Rod Clark 458-206-8532 [email protected]

FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS

Fiberglass Entry Doors: All fiberglass doors manufactured by Therma-Tru®. Specification is for complete entry systems with components manufactured by Therma-Tru® and assembled by independent fabricators.

SECTION 081613 – FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

081613 - 2

Construction: Smooth Star®

1/16-inch minimum thickness, proprietary fiberglass-reinforced thermoset composite, surface lightly tex-tured. Door edges are machinable kiln-dried pine, primed, lock edge reinforced with engineered lum-ber core, lockset area reinforced with solid blocking for hardware backup. Door bottom edge is mois-ture- and decay-resistant composite. Core is foamed-in-place polyurethane, density 1.9 pcf minimum.

Entry Doors: Four-Panel Square Top.

Frames: Standard wood frame.

Frame Width: As required

Sills: Per hardware schedule

HARDWARE

Hinges: 4 x 4 x 0.098 inches finished to match hardware, plated screws to match

Finish: Brushed nickel

PART 2 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect in writing any unacceptable conditions that would ad-versely affect installation or subsequent performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

INSTALLATION

Install fiberglass doors in full compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved shop draw-ings.

Maintain alignment and compatibility with adjacent work. Install doors level, plumb, true, and aligned with frames with uniform clearances.

FINISHING

Finish in compliance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.

PROTECTION

Protect installed products until completion of project.

Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products prior to Substantial Completion in accordance with manu-facturer’s written recommendations.


SECT

ION

0850

00 -

WIN

DOW

SCH

EDUL

EEU

NIC

E 16

APA

RTM

ENTS

EUN

ICE

N

EW M

EXIC

O

No.

Loca

tion

Type

Eleva

tion

Mat

eria

lEx

terio

rDe

tails

Rem

arks

Colo

rW

idth

Heig

htW

idth

Heig

htHe

adJa

mb

Sill

Glaz

ing

1 B

edro

om

108A

Bedr

oom

1Gl

idin g

W1Co

mpos

iteWh

ite4'

-0"

4'-0

"3'

-11

1/2"

3'-1

1 1/

2"7E

/A3.

37D

/A3.

37B

/A3.

3Se

e Spe

cHo

rizon

tal L

ouve

r Blin

d

2 B

edro

om

208A

Bedr

oom

1Gl

idin g

W1Co

mpos

iteWh

ite4'

-0"

4'-0

"3'

-11

1/2"

3'-1

1 1/

2"7E

/A3.

37D

/A3.

37B

/A3.

3Se

e Spe

cHo

rizon

tal L

ouve

r Blin

d21

0ABe

droo

m 2

Glidi

ngW1

Comp

osite

White

4'-0

"4'

-0"

3'-1

1 1/

2"3'

-11

1/2"

7E/A

3.3

7D/A

3.3

7B/A

3.3

See S

pec

Horiz

onta

l Lou

ver B

lind

Roug

h Op

enin

gUn

it Di

men

sions

10

AU

GU

ST 2

015

085000 -

1


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 085400 – COMPOSITE WINDOWS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

085400 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

Section Includes: Composite-framed windows of the following types: gliding.

REFERENCES

General: Standards listed by reference form a part of this specification section. Standards listed are identi-fied by issuing authority, abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation. Standards subse-quently referenced in this Section are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designa-tion.

American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products.

AAMA 615 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Per-forming Organic Coatings on Plastic Profiles.

NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors and skylights (AAMA/WDMA/CSA/101/I.S.2/A440).

ASTM International (ASTM):

ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass.

ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from In-strumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls.

ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.

ASTM F2090 - Standard Specification for Window Fall Prevention Devices with Emergency Escape (Egress) Release Mechanisms.

Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC):

Insulating Glass Unit Certification.

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance of Canada (IGMAC) and Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):

Insulating Glass Units Standard CAN/CGSB 12.8-97.

International Standards Organization (ISO):

ISO 14021 - Environmental Labels and Declarations -- Self-Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Envi-ronmental Labeling).


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

085400 - 2

National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC):

NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors.

NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.

Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):

WDMA Hallmark Certification Program for Manufacturers.


Structural Performance Requirements: As indicated on structural drawings.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product required.

Shop Drawings: Showing methods of installation, plans, sections, elevations and details of walls, specified loads, flashings, vents, sealants, and interfaces with all materials not supplied by the window manufacturer, and identification of proposed component parts and finishes.

Samples: Selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Submit two complete sample sets of each type of material required.

Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements.

Test and Evaluation Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer installation, storage, and other instructions.

Warranty documents specified herein.

Owner’s Manual: Bound manual clearly identified with project name, location, and completion date. Iden-tify type and size of units installed. Provide recommendations for periodic inspections, care, and mainte-nance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary repair.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications:

Minimum five years’ experience in the commercial installation of products required for the Project.

Experience on at least five projects of similar size, type and complexity as the Project.

An entity utilizing workers competent in techniques required by manufacturer for product types and ap-plications indicated.


Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

Deliver materials to Project in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

085400 - 3

Storage and Protection: Store materials and accessories protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer off ground, under cover and not exposed to weather and construction activities.

WARRANTY

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's transferrable, non-prorated limited warranty.

Warranty Period, Glass: 20 years.

Warranty Period, Non-Glass Parts: 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

COMPOSITE WINDOWS

General: Provide composite windows complying with the performance requirements indicated and tested according to NAFS (AAMA/WDMA/CSA/101/I.S.2/A440).

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Andersen Corporation: Andersen 100 Series windows.

Substitution Limitations: All other manufacturers: Submit substitution request in accordance with Section 01 25 00 - "Substitution Procedures".

MATERIALS

Material Composition: Extruded composite profile consisting of 40 percent reclaimed pre-consumer wood fiber and 60 percent thermoplastic polymer, by weight.

Manufacturer Designation: Fibrex material.

Interior Color: White.

Exterior Color: White.

Exterior Color Retention: Resist fading with a change of no more than 5 Delta E units over 10 years in com-pliance with color retention provisions of AAMA 615 and ASTM D2244.

WINDOW W1.

Window Type: Gliding as indicated on Drawings and window schedule.

Performance Requirements: Comply with NAFS (AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2).

Gliding, Performance Class and Grade: LC-PG30 (71-1/2 inches by 71-1/2 inches).

Environmental Qualifications:

ENERGY STAR performance.

Weather-stripping Type and Material: Three fins and pile, polypropylene.

Overall Depth: 3-1/4 inches (82.6 mm).

Attachment Flange: 1-3/8 inches Flange Setback


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

085400 - 4

Hardware:

Hardware Type and Material: Self-latching, polycarbonate with integral color.

Rollers and Guides Type and Material: Dual adjustable, brass with extruded glide track.

Window Opening Control Device: Provide device to restrict operable sash to less than 4 inches maxi-mum clear opening and releasable, in compliance with ASTM F2090.

Insect Screens:

Frame Material: Aluminum.

Frame Color: Match window frame.

Insect Screen Material: Fiberglass cloth secured with vinyl spline.

GLAZING W1.

Thermal Transmission (U-Factor), NFRC 100: 0.29.

Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), NFRC 200: 0.19.

Visible Light Transmittance (VLT), NFRC 200: 0.49.

Sound Transmission Class (STC)/Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Classification (OITC), ASTM E90: 25/21.

Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units certified through The Insulating Glass Certification Council as con-forming to the requirements of IGCC and ASTM E2190

Manufacturer Designation: Andersen SmartSun Low-E Glass.

Seal and Spacer Type: Dual sealed insulating glass units with polyisobutylene primary seal, silicone secondary seal and metal spacers with bent or soldered corners.

Glass Type: Flat glass, ASTM C1036

Glass Pattern: None.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Verify that all substrate conditions are suitable for installation in compliance with manufacturer’s recom-mendations.

Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and any conditions not in compli-ance with manufacturer’s recommendations have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

General: Comply with manufacturer’s product recommendations, including but not limited to the Andersen Unit Installation Guide, and installation information in product literature and on product packaging. Comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

Perform flashing per Manufacturer’s instructions.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

085400 - 5

Install units plumb, level, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. Install drip cap at head of single units and joined assemblies.

Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

Install insulation in shim space around unit perimeter to maintain continuity of building insulation. Do not overfill.

Hold back exterior finish materials from edge of unit to allow for expansion and contraction and instal-lation of proper joint sealant with backing materials. Seal perimeter of unit after exterior finish is ap-plied per requirements of Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

Adjust sashes, insect screens, ventilators, hardware and accessories as applicable for correct fit. Adjust weather stripping for smooth operation and weather-tight closure.

CLEANING

Remove protective films and non-permanent labels prior to 90 days after installation.

Remove excess sealant, soiling, dirt and other substances. Clean window frame and glass surfaces. Avoid damaging coatings and finishes.

Touch-up, repair or replace glass or other window components broken, scratched or damaged during con-struction prior to Substantial Completion.

Remove and lawfully dispose of construction debris from Project site.

PROTECTION

Site Tolerances:

Adjust operation, insect screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weath-erstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

Extend vapor barrier to interior face of unit frame and attach.

CLEANING

Clean units using cleaning material and methods specifically recommended by window manufacturer.

Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes.

Protect unit surfaces from masonry cleaning solution that could damage insulation glass panels or hard-ware.

Remove debris from work site and properly dispose of debris.

PROTECTION

Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on site.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

087100 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Hardware schedule and keying schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

HARDWARE

Hinges:

Stainless-steel hinges with stainless-steel pins for exterior. Nonremovable hinge pins for exterior exposure. Ball-bearing hinges for entry doors. Three hinges for doors 90 inches (2300 mm) or less in height.

Locksets and Latchsets:

Exterior: BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 for bored locks and latches. Interior: BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 3 for bored locks and latches. BHMA A156.5, Grade 2 for auxiliary locks. Lever handles on all locksets and latchsets.

Key locks to Owner's new grand master-key system per Owner’s requirements.

Cylinders with six-pin tumblers. Provide construction keying.

Hardware Finishes:

Hinges: Primed for painting except at exterior doors. Locksets, Latchsets, and Exit Devices: Satin chrome plated. Other Hardware: Matching finish of lockset/latchset.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Mount hardware in locations required to comply with governing regulations and according to SDI A250.8 and DHI WDHS.3.

Deliver keys to Owner.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

087100 - 2

HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Designations listed in this schedule refer to the following manufacturers unless otherwise notes.

Item: Manufacturer:

Hinges Stanley

Interior Locksets, Interior Deadbolts Kwikset

Door Stops, Door Viewer, Invisible Latch Ives/Ingersoll Rand

Thresholds Pemko Mfg. Co.

General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.

Set #1 - Typical Residential Entrance Door

3 Hinges; by prime entry door manufacturer

1 Passage Lockset; 721KNL x Kingston lever x 2 3/4” backset x ANSI strike x strike box x US26D

1 Deadbolt; 816 Series x keyed one-side x 2 3/4” backset x strike box x US32D

1 Hinge Pin Door Stop; 70 x US26D

2 Viewer; 698 x 190 degree view x US26D

1 Threshold; 2750A x ADA x 10” wide x mill finish x length as required


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

087100 - 3

Set #2 – Mechanical Room Double Door

The intention is to make this door as unobtrusive as possible. There is no lever or pull required for this door

6 Hinges x door manufacturer

1 Deadbolt; 816 Series x keyed one-side x 2 3/4” backset x US26D

1 Surface Bolt; #253-8” x angle strike x US26D

1 Invisible Latch; C12 x US26D x length as required x CL14 Auxilliary Pusher


Set #3 – Utility Room Door

3 Hinges; by prime entry door manufacturer

1 Passage Lockset; 721KNL x Kingston lever x 2 3/4” backset x ANSI strike x strike box x US26D

1 Deadbolt; 816 Series x keyed one-side x 2 3/4” backset x strike box x US32D


Set #4 – Bathroom or Bedroom Door

3 Hinges by prehung door manufacturer


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

087100 - 4

1 Cylindrical Privacy Lockset; SL3000WI x Winston lever x 2 3/4” backset x strike box x US26D

1 Spring Stop (Bedroom only); #61 x US26D

1 Hinge Pin Door Stop (Bathroom only); 70 x US26D

3 Silencers; #20 (Gray)

Set #5 – Closet Door

3 Hinges x prehung door manufacturer

1 Cylindrical Passage Lockset; SL1000WI x Dover lever x 2 3/4” backset x strike box x US26D

1 Hinge Pin Door Stop; 70 x US26D

3 Silencers; #20 (Gray) (at head)

Set #6 - Sliding Closet Door

1 Hardware Set 2222 Sliding Door Hardware x 1 3/8” doors x 2 wheel hangers x 75 lb. panel capacity x Track length as required x 2 Pulls #15 x US26D x 2 Pulls #35 x US26D in Type A Accessible Unit


SECTION 088300 – MIRRORS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

088300 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product data.

Samples: As follows:

Mirrored Glass: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SILVERED, FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror-coating process.

Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality, clear float glass.

Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

Safety Glazing Products: Film-backed mirrors complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Cat-egory II materials.


Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating, safety backing and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror-backing paint and mirror mastic as certified by mirror manufacturer.

Aluminum J-Channels: Clear satin anodized aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of each mirror in a single piece.

FABRICATION

Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.

Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric pene-tration of glass coating.

Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recom-mended in writing by film-backing manufacturer.

SECTION 088300 – MIRRORS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

088300 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Profes-sional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting surface.

Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mir-rors.

Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. Set bottom channel on top of lavatory backsplash.

Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic.

Set mirror on top of lavatory backsplash

Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation.


SECT

ION

0900

00 -

FINI

SH S

CHED

ULE

EUN

ICE

16 A

PART

MEN

TSEU

NIC

E

NEW

MEX

ICO

No.

Loca

tion

Floor

Base

Wal

lsCe

iling

sRe

mar

ksNo

rthEa

stSo

uth

Wes

tPa

int

Pain

t

M

ater

ial

Colo

rM

ater

ial

Finish

Mat

eria

lFin

ishM

ater

ial

Finish

Mat

eria

lFin

ishM

ater

ial

Finish

Lust

erM

ater

ial

Finish

Lust

er

101

Living

/ D

ining

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

ll10

2Ki

tchen

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

ll10

3Clo

set

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llDu

ct So

ffit a

t 7'-0

" fini

shed

clea

r min.

104

Mech

anica

lSe

aler

Clear

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

105

Bath

Cera

mic T

ileWo

odPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llDu

ct So

ffit a

t 7'-0

" fini

shed

clea

r min.

106

Hall

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llDu

ct So

ffit a

t 7'-0

" fini

shed

clea

r min.

107

Close

tRe

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

--

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

108

Bedr

oom

1Re

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

109

Close

tRe

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

201

Living

/ D

ining

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

ll20

2Ki

tchen

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

ll20

3Clo

set

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llDu

ct So

ffit a

t 7'-0

" fini

shed

clea

r min.

204

Mech

anica

lRe

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

205

Bath

Cera

mic T

ileWo

odPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llDu

ct So

ffit a

t 7'-0

" fini

shed

clea

r min.

206

Hall

Resil

ient

1MD

FPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llGW

BPa

intEg

gshe

llDu

ct So

ffit a

t 7'-0

" fini

shed

clea

r min.

207

Close

tRe

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

--

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

208

Bedr

oom

1Re

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

209

Close

tRe

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

210

Bedr

oom

1Re

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

211

Close

tRe

silien

t1

MDF

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

GWB

Paint

Eggs

hell

For t

he pu

rpos

es of

the F

inish

Sche

dule;

Nor

th is

to th

e top

of th

e Buil

ding A

plan

shee

t, Ea

st is

at th

e righ

t, So

uth

is to

the b

otto

m an

d Wes

t is a

t the

left.

Buil

ding B

is op

posit

e han

d to B

uildin

g A

10

AU

GU

ST 2

015

09

00

00

- 1


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 092400 – EXTERIOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY


On new building construction: Supply and installation of fiber reinforced, one-coat stucco assembly over continuous insulation and a fiberglass mesh embedded into the brown coat for crack resistance with an acrylic based elastomeric finish coat.

On new refuse enclosure wall construction: Supply and installation of fiber reinforced, one-coat stucco assembly over concrete masonry units with a fiberglass mesh embedded into the brown coat for crack resistance with an acrylic based elastomeric finish coat.

REFERENCES

ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C578 - Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath

ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed portland Cement-Based Plaster

ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of portland Cement-Based Plaster

ASTM C933 - Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath

ASTM C1032 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base

ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for portland Cement Based Plaster

ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UUB 790A - Specification for Building Paper

ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

One-Coat Stucco Assembly with a water-resistive barrier, continuous insulation, wire fabric or metal lath, pre-mixed stucco base coat, fiberglass reinforcing mesh embedded in stucco brown coat, and an acrylic based finish coat.

SUBMITTALS

General: Submit samples, water resistive barrier coating Evaluation Reports and manufacturer’s product data sheets in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements Submittal Section.

Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as re-quired to accurately represent each color and texture used on project. Prepare each sample using same


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 2

tools and techniques for actual project application. Maintain and make available, at job site, approved samples.

Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit sample copies of Manufacturer's Warranty indicating Single Source Re-sponsibility for Water Resistive Barrier coating, Stucco Base coat,finish coat and optional Primer, level coat and reinforcing mesh as specified.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Qualifications:

Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco assemblies in United States for at least ten years and shall have completed projects of same general scope and complexity.

Applicator: Shall be experienced and competent in installation of stucco materials and liquid-applied membranes, and shall provide evidence of a minimum of five years experience in work similar to that required by this section.

Stucco Assembly Functional Criteria:

General: Stucco application shall be to vertical substrates or to substrates sloped for positive drainage. Substrates sloped for drainage shall have additional protection from weather exposure that might be harmful to coating performance.

Testing to meet International Code Council Acceptance Criteria AC11.

Performance Requirements of Stucco Assembly

Test Method ICC AC 11 Criteria ResultsAccelerated Weathering ASTM G153 2000 Hours No deleterious effect

Freeze-Thaw Resistance ICC AC 11 10 cycles Pass

Transverse Wind Load Resistance

ASTM E330 Meet Design Loads Refer to ICC-ES ESR-2564

Fire Resistance ASTM E119

One hour fire Refer to ICC-ES ESR-2564

Drainage ICC AC 11 90 % Refer to ICC-ES ESR-2564

Performance Requirements of Coatings applied to Expanded polystyrene features: Must comply with ASTM E 2568 or ICC Acceptance Criteria AC 219 for EIFS.

Substrate Conditions:

Substrate materials and construction shall conform to the building code having jurisdiction.

Substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence and other harmful contami-nants.

Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with 1/4 in (6.4 mm) within any 10 ft (3 m) radius.

Maximum deflection of substrate system under positive or negative design loads shall not exceed L/360 of span.

Expansion and Control Joints: Continuous expansion and control joints shall be installed at locations in ac-cordance with ASTM C1063 and ASTM C926.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 3

Substrate movement, and expansion and contraction of Stucco Assembly and adjacent materials shall be taken into account in design of expansion joints, with proper consideration given to sealant proper-ties, installation conditions, temperature range, coefficients of expansion of materials, joint width to depth ratios, and other material factors. Minimum width of expansion joints shall be as specified by the designer or shown on the project drawings.

In accordance with ASTM C1063, expansion or control joints shall be installed in walls not more than 144 ft² (13.4 m²) in area, and not more than 100 ft² (9.3 m²) in area for all non-vertical applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft (5.5 m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.

For direct application to concrete or masonry, stucco joints are required only at control/expansion joints in the underlaying concrete or masonry.


Delivery: Deliver Stucco Assembly products in original packaging with manufacturer's identification.

Storage: Store Stucco Assembly products in a dry location, out of direct sunlight, off the ground, and pro-tected from moisture.

SITE / ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Substrate Temperature: Do not apply stucco assembly products to substrates whose temperature are below 40F (4C) or contain frost or ice.

Inclement Weather: Do not apply stucco base during inclement weather, unless appropriate protection is employed.

Sunlight Exposure: Avoid, when possible, installation of the stucco assembly in direct sunlight. Application of finishes in direct sunlight in hot weather may adversely affect aesthetics.

Do not apply stucco base coats or finishes if ambient temperature falls below 40ºF (4ºC) within 24 hours of application. Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during dry weather and strong blasts of dry air.

Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other conditions that may ad-versely affect the performance of the stucco assembly and shall be free of residual moisture.

COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING:

Coordination: Coordinate stucco assembly installation with other construction operations.

WARRANTY

Warranty: Upon request, at completion of installation, provide manufacturer’s Standard Limited Stucco Warranty


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 4

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturer, Basis of Design: brands of Parex USA, Inc., including Parex, El Rey Stucco, Lahabra Stucco or TEIFS, 4125 E. La Palma Ave., Suite 250, Anaheim, CA 92807 Contact: Architectural Sales, Andy Townes at (866.516.0061) or [email protected] or Technical Support (800.226.2424).

Components: Obtain components of brands of Parex USA Stucco Assemblies from authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions of other materials are permitted without prior written permission from Parex USA for this project.

MATERIALS

Stucco System Base Coat (3/8 in – 1/2 in)

Fastwall™ Concentrate: Proprietary mixture of Portland cement and proprietary ingredients mixed with clean, cool, potable water, and ASTM C897 or ASTM C144 sand added in the field.

Reinforcing Meshes: For embedment into wet brown coat

Krak-Master Stucco Mesh Mesh: Weight 4.5 oz. per sq. yd (153 g/m2) reinforcing mesh. Typical-ly green in color

Foundation Coating Basecoat:

WallEase Basecoat: Polymer modified cement basecoat suitable for installation over as formed concrete stem walls to level surface in preparation for acrylic/elastomeric colored textured finish.

Finish:

Perma-Flex Elastomeric Finish™: Factory blended, 100% acrylic Elastomeric polymer based finish, inte-grally colored. Finish texture and color as selected by Project Designer.

RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

General: Stucco assembly and its related materials shall conform to the requirements of ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. 2564 and shall conform to this specification.

Substrate Materials:

Plywood: Minimum 5/16 in (8 mm) thick exterior grade or Exposure I plywood for studs spaced 16 in (406 mm) o.c. and 3/8 in (9 mm) thick exterior type plywood minimum for studs spaced 24 in (610 mm) o.c. Plywood shall comply be exterior grade or Exposure 1 and comply with DOC PS-1. See structural drawings for additional requirements.

Other as approved by stucco manufacturer in writing prior to the project.

Water-Resistive Barriers: Over plywood Sheathing

Dupont Tyvek Stuccowrap. See Section 072500 – Weather Barriers

Lath and Accessories: Conform to ASTM C847, ASTM C933, ASTM C1032, ASTM C1063 and Appendix


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 5

Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard steel products with minimum G60 galvanizing. Includes plaster stops, control joints, weep screeds, corner beads, flashings, etc…

Metal Plaster Bases: 20 Gauge self-furred stucco netting or a minimum 2.5 lb/yd2 (1.4 kg/m2) or 3.4 lb/yd2 (1.8 kg/m2) expanded metal diamond lath, or welded wire lath in accordance with applicable codes and standards.

Weep Screeds: Foundation weep screed with minimum 3-1/2 inch vertical attachment flange.

Continuous Rigid Insulation:

Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with max-imum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:

Type IX

Density: 2.0 PCF

Compressive Resistance: 25 psi

R-Value: 4.0 / inch minimum.

Produced and labeled under a third party quality program as required by applicable building code; and produced by a manufacturer approved by Parex USA.

Thickness as indicated on drawings.

Seals, Sealants and Bond Breakers: Sealants shall conform to ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Backer rod shall be closed-cell polyethylene foam.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of the stucco assembly.

Substrate Examination: Examine prior to stucco base installation as follows:

Substrate shall be of a type approved by stucco manufacturer. Plywood substrates shall be gapped 1/8 in (3.2 mm) at all edges.

Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions.

Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants.

Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's specifications and applica-ble building codes.

Ensure that all flashings have been installed.

Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing proper installation of the stucco assembly. Do not proceed with the stucco assembly work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

PREPARATION

New Construction: Weather Barriers and Wire Fabric Lath and Metal Lath: Install according to ICC Evalua-tion Report ESR 2564, ASTM C1063 and Appendix and the Building Code.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 6

Concrete Masonry Units: Remove projecting joint mortar so it is flush with the plane of the wall. Remove surface contaminants such as efflorescence, existing paint or any other bond inhibiting material by sand-blasting, waterblasting, wire brushing, chipping or other appropriate means. Pre-moisten the surface with water just prior to placement of stucco, or apply one uniform coat of acrylic emulsion additive according to application instructions.

Concrete (Cast-in-Place): Provide a surface that is slightly scarified, water absorbent, straight and true to line and plane. Remove form ties and trim projecting concrete so it is even with the plane of the wall. Remove form release agents. Pre-moisten the surface with water just prior to placement of stucco, or apply one uni-form coat of acrylic emulsion additive according to application instructions.

MIXING

Mix proprietary products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable Product Data Sheets.

APPLICATION

General: Stucco assembly and its related materials shall conform to the requirements of ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. 2564 and shall conform to this specification.

Water Resistive Barrier:

Install the approved sheet good material over all sheathing substrates.

The material must be a code approved, water vapor permeable water resistive barrier.

When installing insulation board behind the stucco assembly, the intervening material must be Dupont Tyvek Stuccowrap, DrainWrap, CommericalWrap D, other sheet good water resistive bar-rier, incorporating in itself a means of drainage, and maintaining a current ICC Evaluation Report

Flash all rough openings with Flashing Membrane or reinforced fluid applied barrier.

Stucco Base:

Stucco Base shall be applied in one or two coats to a minimum thickness of 3/8 in (9.5 mm) by hand troweling or machine spraying the mixture to the wire lath in accordance with product data Sheets. The maximum thickness applied in one pass is 1/2 in (17 mm).

Rod surface to true plane and float to densify.

Trowel to smooth and uniform surface to receive acrylic polymer finish coat.

While brown coat is still wet, embed the fiberglass mesh into surface and smooth to flush taking care to remove all loose ends, wrinkles etc. and over lapping ends a minimum of 2 inches

Foundation Basecoat: Apply a thin layer per manufacturer’s written instructions and trowel to a smooth, plumb finish.

Finish:

Remove surface contaminants such as dust or dirt without damaging the substrate.

Ambient and surface temperature must be 40°F (4°C) or higher during application and drying time. Supplemental heat and protection from precipitation must be provided as needed.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092400 - 7

Use only on surfaces that are sound, clean, dry, unpainted, and free from any residue that might affect the ability of the finish to bond to the surface.

Apply exterior wall finish coats according to manufacturer’s product data sheets.

Protect finish coats from inclement weather until completely dry.

Curing

Stucco Base: Keep stucco moist for at least 48 hours (longer in dry weather) by lightly fogging walls. Start light fogging after initial set of 1–2 hours. Air cure an additional 3-5 days before application of finish coats

Air cure acrylic and elastomeric finish coats only. Do not wet cure.

CLEAN-UP

Remove and legally dispose of stucco assembly component debris material from job site.

PROTECTION

Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.

Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing during installation.

Provide protection of installed finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until fully cured and dry.

Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Designer/Owner.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 092900 – GYPSUM BOARD EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092900 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product data. Samples for textured finish.

DEFINITIONS

Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide mate-rials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an inde-pendent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directo-ry" or GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual."

Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified accord-ing to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manu-al."

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.

Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having juris-diction.

MANUFACTURERS


Gypsum Board and Related Products:


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092900 - 2

American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum Corp. National Gypsum Company. United States Gypsum Co.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

PANEL PRODUCTS

Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. Regular type unless otherwise indicated. Type as required for specific fire-resistance-rated assem-blies. Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.

Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated. Regular type unless oth-erwise indicated, Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated.

Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, ASTM C 1288, or ASTM C 1325. As required by bathtub sur-round manufacturer at grab bar installation.

Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, of thickness indicated. Regular type unless otherwise indicated, Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated.

Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated, with manufacturer's stand-ard edges. Regular type.

ACCESSORIES

Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plas-tic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. For exterior trim, use accessories formed from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges.

Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.

Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.

Joint Compounds: Drying-type, ready-mixed, all-purpose compounds.

Use lightweight, all-purpose joint compound for texturing

Use setting-type compounds at exterior soffits.

Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant com-plying with ASTM C 834.

Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (unfaced).

Textured Finish: Aggregate finish where indicated. Provide sprayed-on orange peel finish at walls, ceilings and soffits.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092900 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws.

Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abut-ting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.

Pre-rock locations where required to maintain fire rated construction and where unrated partitions inter-sect fire-rated walls unless otherwise permitted by fire-rated assembly.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at open-ings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing stand-ard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

Single-Layer Application:

On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possi-ble and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels to minimize end joints.

Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

092900 - 4

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for loca-tions indicated:

Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasten-ers, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.


SECTION 093013 – CERAMIC TILING EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

093013 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY


Ceramic tile.

DEFINITIONS

Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indi-cated.

Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories in-volving color selection.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.

Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.


Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient tempera-ture and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufac-turer's written instructions.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

093013 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selec-tion:

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

PRODUCTS, GENERAL

ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Defini-tions" Article.

ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards refer-enced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteris-tics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:

As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

TILE PRODUCTS

Basis-of-Design Product: The design cabinets specified is based on the product named. Subject to compli-ance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product.

Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc.

Heathland: Architect to select a single color or factory blend from manufacturer’s complete range.

Ceramic Mosaic Tile at Bathroom Floors: Factory-mounted glazed ceramic mosaic tile.

Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay. Surface: Smooth. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm). Grout Color: As selected. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile:

2”x2” Bullnose for use as transition to vinyl tile.

6”x6” Ceramic Tile at Range Backsplash: Glazed ceramic mosaic tile.

Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay. Surface: Smooth.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

093013 - 3

Module Size: 6 by 6 inches. Grout Color: As selected. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile:

6”x6” Bullnose for use as transition to wall.

SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex addi-tive.

Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.

Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry in-gredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.


Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout sur-faces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other proce-dures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for instal-lations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

093013 - 4

PREPARATION

Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or sili-cone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering with-out interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. In accessible unit extend tile under vanity.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfac-es. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:

For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland ce-ment grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

Where ceramic tile abuts other flooring finishes provide a suitable transition.

FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those ref-erencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

093013 - 5

CLEANING AND PROTECTING

Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of for-eign matter.

Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manu-facturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush sur-faces with clean water before and after cleaning.

When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 096500 – RESILIENT FLOORING EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

096500 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY


Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT).

SUBMITTALS

Product data. For each type of product provided under work of this Section:

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

VOC emissions: Provide low VOC products. Comply with California Department of Health Services Stand-ard Practice for the Testing.

Adhesives and sealants: Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) #11682.

Hard surface flooring: Comply with FloorScore


Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

The installation site must be acclimated with HVAC in operation as required. The floor and room tempera-ture, as well as flooring materials and adhesive, must be maintained at 65°–85°F, and the humidity at or below 60% for 48 hours prior to, during, and after the testing and installation. Follow ASTM F 710 guide-lines for subfloor testing and preparation.

After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

096500 - 2

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 arti-cles.

Shaw Commercial Hard Surface Address: 131 Old Mill Road, Cartersville, GA 30120 Phone Number: 1-877-502-7429 Contact: Shaw Commercial Hard Surface, Inforum

LIGHT COMMERCIAL LUXURY VINYL PLANK

Style Name: Native Origins Style Number: 0116V Construction: Light Commercial Luxury Vinyl Plank Class / ASTM F 1700: Class III Printed Film Vinyl Plank, Type B (embossed) Wearlayer Thickness: 12 mil or 0.012" (0.3 mm) Overall Thickness: 2.5 mm or nominal 0.098" Nominal Dimensions: 6" wide x 48" long Actual Size / ASTM F 536: Width: 6" or 152.4 mm, Length: 48" or 1219.2mm Backing Class: Commercial Grade Finish: ExoGuard™ Quartz-Enhanced Urethane Added Antimicrobial: FlorSept™ Installation: Glue Down Recycled Content: Post-consumer – 39%, Pre-consumer – 33%

TESTING

Slip Resistance / ASTM D 2047: >0.65 (wet/dry) Static Load Limit / (modi_ed) ASTM F 970: 1500 psi Flexibility / ASTM F 137: Passes Resistance to Heat / ASTM F 1514: Passes Resistance to Light / ASTM F 1515: Passes Resistance to Chemicals / ASTM F 925: Passes Radiant Flux / ASTM 648: Passes, >0.45 watts/cm2, NFPA Class I Smoke Density / ASTM E 662: Passes, <450

COLORS AND PATTERNS

Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydrau-lic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indi-cated.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

096500 - 3

Adhesives: Shaw 4100 Resilient flooring Adhesive.

Green Label Plus, solvent free, water-based acrylic adhesive suitable for use in occupied buildings, low odor, and contains zero (calculated) VOCs as recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.

Primer: Product recommended by resilient floor manufacturer for installation over cementitious underlay-ment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Substrates: Sound and properly prepared on grade concrete, APA approved wood subflooring. Substrates must be clean and dry, free of dust, dirt, paint, wax, curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, existing adhe-sives or other contaminants that may interfere with the adhesive bond. Do not use chemically cleaned sub-strates.

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, mois-ture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installa-tion only after substrates pass testing.

Concrete substrates must comply with limitations of moisture and alkalinity. In-situ Relative Humidity test must be performed per ASTM F 2170. Results cannot exceed 87% RH and substrate pH read-ings should be between 7.0 and 10.0.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sec-tions and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use sol-vents.

Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be in-stalled.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

096500 - 4

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with in-stallation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


TILE INSTALLATION

Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at oppo-site edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

Lay tiles square with room axis.

Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

Lay tiles with grain running in one direction

Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.

Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

Adhere tiles to flooring substrates per manufacturer’s instruction using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without mov-ing panels.


SECTION 099000 – PAINTING EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.

Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components:

Light fixtures.

Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inac-cessible areas:

Foundation spaces. Furred areas. Pipe spaces.

Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:

Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze. Brass.

Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and MFA.

SUBMITTALS

Product data for each paint system specified.

Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use.

List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applica-tions similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction rec-ord of successful in-service performance.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 2

Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.


Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient tem-perature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

JOB CONDITIONS

Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temper-atures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air tem-peratures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at tem-peratures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Furnish paint with manufacturer’s original identifying labels describing contents. Deliver extra paint to Owner after completion of work and obtain a receipt for each color.

Furnish one gallon of finish paint for each type, color and sheen of applied paint.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following:

Benjamin Moore & Co. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. M.A.B. Paints.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 3

PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

Material Compatibility: Provide, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of perfor-mance for proposed substitutions.

Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of custom mixed colors.

Accent colors indicated may be deep tones.

LATEX JOINT-SEALANT

Applications: Painter’s caulk for interior joints.

Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated or required to fill minor gaps, provide products complying with the following:

Products: Available products include the following:

Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. ALEX Painters Caulk; DAP Products Inc. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint appli-cation requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over previously primed and finished substrates.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 4

PREPARATION

General: Remove hardware, electrical device plates, equipment, light fixtures, signage, equipment and similar removable items that are not to be painted. Do not attempt to mask or paint around these items un-less acceptable to Architect. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

Reinstall all items when paint is dry.

Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted sur-faces.

Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

Provide barrier coats over incompatible existing coatings or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with previously painted sub-strates.

Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufactur-er's written instructions.

Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recom-mended in writing by paint manufacturer.

Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechani-cal methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

Wood Substrates:

Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

Previously Painted Surfaces: If in sound condition, clean the surface of all foreign material. Smooth, hard or glossy coatings and surfaces should be dulled by abrading the surface. Apply a test area, al-lowing paint to dry before testing adhesion. If adhesion is poor, additional abrasion of the surface


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 5

and/or removal of the previous coating may be necessary. Retest surface for adhesion. If paint is peel-ing or badly weathered, sand and clean surface to sound substrate and treat as a new surface.

Ferrous Metals: Clean previously painted ferrous metal surfaces to remove oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign substances. Rust or other corrosion shall be removed to bare, shiny metal and imme-diately primed as specified. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recom-mendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same pri-mer as the shop coat.

Repair holes, cracks, scuffed or marred surfaces and other existing damage in surfaces to be repainted. Sand repair smooth and spot prime so that no evidence of repair remains after painting. Use repair com-pounds and putties specifically formulated and recommended by the manufacturer for the specific repair.

Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.

Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during applica-tion. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

APPLICATION

General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, cracked surfaces or conditions detri-mental to formation of a durable paint film. All loose existing paint shall be removed prior to beginning new painting.

Paint color locations, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.

Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.

Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 6

Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.

Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat.

Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.

Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.

Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.

Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufac-turer for the material and texture required.

Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturers recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to previously field painted items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

Raceway, conduit and fittings.

Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manu-facturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

CLEANING

Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint ma-terials from the site.

After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

The disposal of hazardous waste shall conform to applicable federal, state and local regulations.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 7

PROTECTION

Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings pro-vided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.

Provide additional coats as required to achieve full coverage.

Textured Gypsum Drywall Systems: In all interior spaces.

1 ct. Promar 400 Latex Primer 2 ct. Property Solutions Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20W03050

Wood, MDF, Hardboard (Semi-gloss): In all interior spaces.

1 ct. Premium Wall and Wood Primer 2 ct. Property Solutions Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31W03060

Exposed Concrete Floor in Mechanical Closets:

2 ct. H&C Concrete Sealer – Wet Look Water Based.

EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

Fiberglass Entry Doors and Metal Frames, Fiber Cement Fascia: Over factory finish 2 ct. A-100 Exterior Latex Satin A82-100 Series

Exterior Gypsum Soffit: 1 ct A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer 2 ct. A-100 Exterior Latex Satin A82-100 Series

Wood: Exterior Acrylic Opaque Stain. Self-priming.

First and Second Finish Coats: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application.

S-W: Sherwin-Williams; Woodscapes House Stain: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

Note: Clean any galvanized metal hangers or brackets per manufacturer’s written instruction prior to coating.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

099000 - 8

Ferrous Metal Stairs, Gates and Privacy Screens

Gloss Acrylic Polyurethane Finish: Two (2) finish coats over epoxy primer.

Primer: Two-component, factory-formulated, high solids, high build, polyamide epoxy primer de-signed to protect steel in exterior exposures.

S-W Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy (Part A; B58-600 Series, Part B; B58V600 Hardener): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils and not greater than 10 mils.

First and Second Finish Coats: Two-component, factory-formulated, high-gloss, polyester modified, acrylic polyurethane alkyd enamel for exterior application.

S-W: Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane (Part A; B65-600 Gloss Series, Part B; B65V600 Hardener): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils and not greater than 6.0 mils.

Add H&C SharkGrip Slip Resistant Additive to finish coats at stair treads.


SECTION 101423 – SIGNS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

101423 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY

This Section includes the following types of signs:

Dimensional characters

SUBMITTALS

General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimen-sions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sec-tions of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accesso-ries, and installation details.

Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering lay-out.

Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and num-bers.

Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.

Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements indi-cated:

Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter and num-ber) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment.

Approved dimensional character samples will be returned for installation into Project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Pro-ject, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.

Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a sin-gle manufacturer.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

101423 - 2

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

Basis-of-Design Product: Gemini Incorporated, Cut Plastic Letter, Cast Metal Letters:

Apartment Numbers - Laser Cut Plastic: Provide character cut from acrylic sheet.

Material: Acrylic. Letter Style: Futura Size: 4” Thickness: 1/8” Finish: Gloss Color: Metallic Silver Mounting: Double sided tape

Aluminum Casting Building Signage: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.

Building Address - Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.

Material: Aluminum. Letter Style: Futura Size: 12” Finish: Clear anodized Mounting: Projected Jam Nut adhered to sheathing. Stand-off character ¼” minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for in-stallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.


INSTALLATION

General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

101423 - 3

Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other de-fects in appearance.

Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.


After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 102800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

102800 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY


Toilet and bath accessories.

Underlavatory guards.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fas-tening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by the specific products indicated.

Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be pro-vided.

COORDINATION

Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. In-stall solid blocking where necessary for secure installation.

Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each metal roof panel specified is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product.

Apartment Bath Accessories: Pamex Bath Accessories. “Corona”

ADA Bathtub Transfer Bench Delta

Underlavatory Guards: Brocar Products, Inc.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

102800 - 2

Truebro, Inc.

MATERIALS

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin).

Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromi-um electrodeposited on base metal.

Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.

Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

FABRICATION

General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not ex-posed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped name-plate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in loca-tions and at heights indicated.

Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. Install solid blocking.


Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Re-place damaged or defective items.

Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

102800 - 3

APARTMENT BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

Material: Chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac) or steel

Towel Bars: Pamex BC3-13800 Series; ¾” square, stainless steel bar. Length as indicated.

Toilet Paper Holder: Pamex BC3-41 Paper Holder – white roller

Robe Hooks: Pamex BC3-22 Double Robe Hook

Shower Curtain Rod: Pamex BSR-31. 1” dia. Bright aluminum, extruded seam tube. Clean cut ends. Wall thickness: 0.025”.

Flange Set: Steel, chrome plated, exposed mount.

Grab Bar: Provide stainless-steel grab bar complying with the following:

Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

Mounting: Concealed screws surface mount application.

Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (32 mm).

Tested to withstand 250 lbs. push or pull when installed per manufacturer’s instructions

Finish: Smooth, 304 satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

Underlavatory Guard: Where this designation is indicated, provide underlavatory guard complying with the following:

Insulating Piping Coverings: White, antimicrobial, molded-vinyl covering for supply and drain piping assemblies intended for use at accessible lavatories to prevent direct contact with and burns from pip-ing. Provide components as required for applications indicated with flip tops at valves that allow ser-vice access without removing coverings.

Removable Bathtub Seat: Where this designation is indicated provide Delta “Designer Transfer Bench” DF566W – Provide at each ADA apartments. Deliver to Owner.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 104416 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

104416 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY


Portable fire extinguishers.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.

Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extin-guishers."

Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

WARRANTY

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace com-ponents of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty peri-od.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity indicated.

Valves: Manufacturer's standard aluminum.

Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

SECTION 104416 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

104416 - 2

Provide manufacturer’s standard bracket.

Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.


Mounting Brackets: Where bracket is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb.


SECTION 105000 – POSTAL SPECIALTIES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

105000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY


Front-loading exterior, high-security cluster box units (HSCBUs) to match existing units to remain.

Adjacent trash receptacle.

REFERENCES

USPS Regulations.

ASTM A 591 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications

ASTM A 653 - Specification For Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvan-nealed) by the Hot Dip Process.

ASTM A 666 - Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar.

ASTM A 1008 - Specification for Steel, Sheet Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural High Strength Low-Alloy and High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

ASTM B 209 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.

ASTM B 221 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty.

Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attach-ments to other work.

Include identification sequence for compartments.

Include layout of identification text.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch square Sam-ples.

Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS regulations, signed by product manufacturer.

Include written approval by Postmaster General.

Qualification Data: For Installer.

Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

105000 - 2

Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Comply with 1118-F USPS Specification.

Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postal specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approv-al. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received.

Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

Handle materials to prevent damage or marring of finish.

Deliver lock keys to Owner by hand, registered mail or overnight package service. Provide a separate en-velope for each set of three keys. Clearly label each envelope with the mailbox address, mailbox unit I.D. number, and mailbox number.

WARRANTY

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace com-ponents of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish tools below that match fasteners installed.

Tamper Resistant Screw Driver (USPS Mail Equipment Shop Part Number MES No. 110050): Furnish not less than three (3) McGard Screwdrivers as required to install the parcel arrow lock cover.

Tamper Resistant Hex Key Driver (USPS Mail Equipment Shop Part Number MES No. 110005): Furnish not less than three (3) McGard Hex Key Drivers as required to install and service the pedestal to con-crete mounting nuts.

Tamper Resistant Torx Screw Driver: Furnish not less than three (3) Torx Screw Drivers for the tamper re-sistant screws used to attach the mailbox unit I.G. numbers to the mailbox units.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

105000 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

CLUSTER BOX UNITS (CBUS)

Consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within freestanding, pedestal-mounted enclosure. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging pair of side-hinged master doors to provide accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS-B-1118E.

MANUFACTURERS

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selec-tion:

Acceptable Manufacturer: Florence Manufacturing Company, 5935 Corporate Drive, Manhattan, KS 66503; ASD.

Tel: (785) 323-4400, Tel: (800) 275-1747. Fax: (800)275-5081. Email: [email protected]. Web: www.florencemailboxes.com.

MAIL BOXES

Provide cluster box units that are designed for use throughout the U.S. in all weather conditions. The basis-of-design Florence Series 1565 Vigilant High Security Cluster Box Unit (HSCBU).

Model 1565-16, Type II: 12 compartments, 3.25 inches (83 mm) high, with 2 parcel compartments and 1 outgoing mail receptacle.

Outdoor Mail Boxes: USPS-approved cluster box units, pedestal mounted, front loading, aluminum cabinet. Stainless steel pedestal.

Compartment Depth: 15 inches.

Cabinet: 0.10 inch thick welded aluminum sheet. Robotically welded.

Doors: Minimum 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick aluminum, with stainless steel hardware and hinges. ¼” hinge rod on all doors.

Locks: 5-pin cylinder cam lock with spring-loaded cover on each unit, 3 keys each lock. (USPS-1172 910 lock)

Parcel-Locker Door Locks: Two-key security system in which control key provides access to parcel-locker key, and parcel-locker key opens compartment and is retained once compartment is opened.

Mailbox Materials:

Left Gate: Extruded 6061-T6 aluminum, powder coat finish 1.25 x 0.50-inch horizontal bar cross section 1.25 x 0.98-inch right of gate vertical bar cross section 1.25 x 1.23-inch left of gate vertical bar cross section


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

105000 - 4

Right Gate: Extruded 6061-T6 aluminum, powder coat finish 1.25 x 0.50-inch horizontal bar cross section 1.42 x 1.25-inch left of gate vertical bar cross section 1.25 x 1.23-inch right of gate vertical bar cross section

Slide Housing: Extruded 6061-T6 aluminum, anodized finish 2.11 x 0.78-inch cross section

Outer Vertical Trim: Extruded 6061-T6 aluminum, powder coat finish 2.03 x 1.96-inch cross section

Top and bottom trim: Extruded 6061-T6 aluminum, powder coat finish 1.45 x .38-inch cross section

Tenant Compartment Door: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum, powder coat finish 0.19-inch nominal thickness

Parcel compartment door: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum, powder coat finish 0.25-inch nominal thickness

Shelf: 5052-H32 aluminum, mill finish 0.05-inch thickness

Insert Panel: 5052-H32 aluminum, mill finish 0.05-inch thickness

Mail Slot: Extruded 6063-t6 aluminum, powder coat finish 2.43 x 2.25-inch cross section

Cabinet: 5052-H32 aluminum, power coat finish 0.10-inch thickness

Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder coat finish.

Color: As selected by architect from full range.

Patron Compartment Door Identification: Standard silver adhesive identification decals, 1.5 inch (38 mm) high by 1.75 inch (44 mm) wide, containing up to 5 characters. Provide optional engraved mail-box and parcel box identification.

Pedestal: Standard steel pedestal with finish to match mailboxes. Provide theft-resistant fasteners.

28.5 inch (724 mm) high pedestal standard with Type II.

Access Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster.

Stainless-Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8M, Type 316.

Provide McGard Security Nuts for two of the four anchor bolts at each mailbox unit mounted diagonal-ly opposed using McGard Hex Nut Driver. Provide standard stainless steel nuts at other two anchor bolt locations.

ACCESSORIES

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide accessories fabricated by same manufacturer as apartment mailboxes.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

105000 - 5

Theft-resistant fastener tools required for the McGard screws and nuts are available from the USPS Mail Equipment Shop.

Tamper Resistant Screw Driver: USPS Mail Equipment Shop Part Number MES No. 110050.

Tamper Resistant Hex Key Driver: USPS Mail Equipment Shop Part Number MES No. 110005.

Mailbox Unit Baseplate Shims: Deslauriers High Impact Plastic Model 20 Econ-O-Shims.

Thicknesses: 1/16, 1/8, ¼, 3/8, ½ as needed. Slot: ½”. Compressive strength: 10,000 – 12,0000 psi. Manufacturer: Deslauriers.

FABRICATION

Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Assemble doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment.

TRASH RECEPTACLE

Basis of Design: Creative Pipe, Inc.

Belize Trash Receptacle, MODEL BET-FBS-32-F-P

Dimensions: 28”Dx38.5”T

Materials:

Vertical Slat Sidewall: ¼”x1-1/2” solid steel flat bar Top Ring: 3/4” solid steel round bar Bottom Ring: ¼” x 3” solid steel flat bar Top: Low domed steel top Liners: Galvanized steel powder coated to match receptacle color

Mounting: Surface mounting for bolting to concrete

Finish: Primer and sealer coat. Electrostatically topcoated with a thermosetting T.G.I.C. polyester pow-der

Color: Gloss black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to perfor-mance of work.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of conditions.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

105000 - 6

INSTALLATION

General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions. A copy of the manufacturer’s instructions is included at the end of this section.

In the case of a conflict between the drawings, specifications and the installation instructions, the most restrictive shall take precedence. Contractor shall notify the architect to resolve any conflict before pro-ceeding with the work.

Align, plumb, and level; anchor in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

To tighten theft resistant security screws and nuts, use tools specifically manufactured for this purpose.

Pedestal-Mounted Postal Specialties: Anchor units with 1/2-inch diameter, stainless-steel anchor bolts with hooked ends.

Anchor trash receptacle per manufacturer’s instruction with stainless steel expansion anchors.

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed, un-less otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-finished appear-ance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer.

Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

Protect finishes from damage by construction activities.


SECTION 107600 – STORAGE SHELVING EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

107600 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Vinyl-coated ventilated shelving.

Adjustable shelf systems.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications.

Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of shelving and interface with other products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

Basis of Design Manufacturer: ClosetMaid (Clairson International)

Provide all storage shelving from a single manufacturer.

MATERIALS

Steel Wire: Basic cold drawn, Grade C-1006; average tensile strength over 100,000 psi; coated.

Wire Coating: Proprietary heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride (PVC) formula resin, plasticizers, stabilizers, pig-ments, and other additives.

Thickness: 9 to 11 mils.

Classification: No ingredients listed as hazardous per OSHA 29CFR1910.0017.

MANUFACTURED UNITS

Wire Shelving: Coated steel wire, 1 inch incremental cross-deck spacing.

Hang Rod: 3/4 inch (25 mm) diameter by 20 gage epoxy-coated tubular steel.

Accessories:

Wall Clips Support Brackets Wall Brackets Hang Track Standards Wall Anchors Toggle Bolts Shelf Brackets End Caps Hanger Bar


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

107600 - 2

Hanger Bar Support Hanger Bar End Caps Corner Support

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Verification of Conditions:

Prepared spaces are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings.

Framing, reinforcement, and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings.

Installer's Examination:

Examine conditions under which installation is to be performed; submit written notification if such condi-tions are unacceptable.

Installation activities before unacceptable conditions have been corrected are prohibited.

Installation indicates installer's acceptance of conditions.

INSTALLATION

Cut shelves 1/2 inch to 1 inch shorter than actual wall measurements; cap all exposed ends.

Provide shelving as indicated in Shelving Schedule at the end of this section.

Drill holes where required using sharp bit; do not punch.

Install shelving plumb and level at heights indicated in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

Use manufactured recommended fasteners for wall materials encountered.

Fixed Shelf Installation: Wall clips, end brackets and support brackets.

Install shelving wall to wall, full width of closet.

All shelving shall be 16” deep SuperSlide.

End Caps: Cap every wire on both end of each shelf.

Wall Clips: Place wall clips No. 910, 911 every 10 to 12 inches on level line. Install clips within 2” of the end of each shelf.

Support Brackets: Place 12” shelf support brackets No. 1164, 36” o.c. max. Secure brackets to wall as recommended by manufacturer.

Wall Brackets: Install SuperSlide wall brackets No. 979 at each end of shelf to support both shelf and hanging bar.

Hanger Bar: Install hanger bar the full width of shelf.

Hanger Bar End Caps: Install round hanger bar end caps specifically designed for use with SuperSlide wall brackets.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

107600 - 3

Hanger Bar Support: Place hanger bar supports No. 5647, 36” o.c. max. at support bracket locations.

Adjustable Shelf Installation: Standards and Brackets:

Install shelving wall-to-wall, full width of closet in configuration indicated on drawings.

All shelving shall be 16” deep SuperSlide.

End Caps: Cap every wire on both end of each shelf.

Install horizontal tracks level, secured with screws or mollies in studs or drywall.

Install standards vertically every 16 inches or 24 inches depending and wall stud spacing. Install a standard no more than 24” from end of shelf. Hang standards from hanging track and secure stand-ards to wall as recommended by manufacturer.

Shelf Brackets: Install 16” shelf brackets to match shelf width.

Wall Brackets: Install SuperSlide wall brackets No. 979 at each end of shelf to support both shelf and hanging bar.

Hanger Bar: Install hanger bar the full width of shelf.

Hanger Bar End Caps: Install round hanger bar end caps specifically design for use with SuperSlide wall brackets.

Hanger Bar Support: Place hanger bar supports No. 5647, 36” o.c. max. at support bracket locations.

Corners: Where and “L” configuration is indicated on plans. Install one shelf the full length of wall. Butt the second shelf to the front of the first shelf.

Use No. 120 corner support brackets on all corner "butt" joints.

CLEANING

As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materi-als, and debris related to this work.

Upon completion of installation, clean all surfaces that have become soiled during installation.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

107600 - 4

SHELVING SCHEDULE

Apartment Coat Closets and Bedroom Closets:

Install one (1), fixed, SuperSlide 16” deep shelf at 72” above finished floor.

Install Hanger Bar

Apartment Coat Closets and Bedroom Closets – Type A Accessible Apartment:

Install one (1), adjustable, SuperSlide 16” deep shelf at 72” above finished floor.

Install Hanger Bar

Provide 48” standards

Allow adjustability from 72” to 42” above finished floor.

Apartment Storage Closets:

Install four (4), adjustable, SuperSlide 16” deep shelves



Apartment Laundry Area:

Install two (2), adjustable, SuperSlide 16” deep shelves




SECTION 122113 – HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

122113 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product data and Samples.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

Provide blinds passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701.

Fabrication: Comply with WCMA A 100.1 unless otherwise indicated.

Provide color-coated finish on exposed metal parts unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate concealed components from noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

Provide permanently lubricated moving parts.

Slats: Extruded PVC (vinyl), UV stabilized and integrally colored.

Slat Width: 1 inch (25 mm).

Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends.

Tilt Operation: Manual with cord or wand.

Mounting: As indicated.

Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: Color as selected from manufacturer’s full range, faux wood grain, matte finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install blinds level, plumb, and located not closer than 1/2 inch to interior face of glass.

Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening when blinds are open.

Head Mounted: Install headrail to underside of opening head as indicated.

Adjust window blinds to operate smoothly and easily throughout entire operational range.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


SECTION 122116 – VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 JAUGUST 2015

122113 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


Submittals: Product data and Samples.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS

Provide blinds passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701.

Fabrication: Comply with WCMA A 100.1 unless otherwise indicated.

Provide color-coated finish on exposed metal parts unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate concealed components from noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

Provide permanently lubricated moving parts.

Rail System: Headrail.

Rails: Manufacturer's standard; long edges returned or rolled; channel-shaped, enclosing operating mechanisms.

PVC Vanes: Extruded PVC (vinyl), “faux wood” UV stabilized and integrally colored.

Vane Profile: Flat.

Nominal Vane Width: 4 inches (100 mm).

Vane Direction Control: Manual with metal chain.

Traversing Control: Manual with metal chain.

Draw and Stack Position: Stack blinds at patio door jamb nearest to wall.

Valance: One tiered vane insert.

Mounting: Wall.

Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Color as selected from manufacturer’s full range, faux wood grain, matte finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install blinds level, plumb, and located not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Coordi-nate mounting with patio door hardware.

Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head.

Adjust window blinds to operate smoothly and easily throughout entire operational range.

SECTION 122116 – VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 JAUGUST 2015

122113 - 2


SECTION 123530 – RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

123530 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY


Kitchen cabinets. Vanity cabinets. Pantry & linen cabinets Plastic-laminate countertops and backsplashes.

DEFINITIONS

Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible sur-faces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.

Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior fac-es of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed."

Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "con-cealed."

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For the following:

Cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops. Cabinet hardware. High-pressure decorative laminate bonding adhesive.

Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

If comparable product is to be provided provide the following samples:

One full-size, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and drawers but without coun-terop.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

123530 - 2

Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:

Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet-work is com-plete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy lev-els during the remainder of the construction period.

Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to es-tablished dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.

Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

COORDINATION

Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Basis-of-Design Product: The design cabinets specified is based on the product named. Subject to compli-ance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product.

Lanz Cabinets; 3025 West 7th Place, Eugene, Oregon.

Northview Collection

Exposed Wood Species: Beech. Stain color as selected from manufacturer’s complete range.

CABINETS

Face Style: Full overlay; door and drawer fully cover cabinet fronts.

Cabinet Style: Face frame.

¾” solid hardwood – glued and screwed doweled.

Case Construction Method: Dados, glue and mechanical fasteners.

Case Materials: 5/8” standard plywood.

Shelves: 5/8” particle board – all adjustable full depth.

Shelf supports: Metal pins in drilled system holes.

Interior Finish: White melamine.

Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer.

Drawers Materials: Drawer sides; ½” birch plywood. Drawer bottoms; ¼” birch plywood.

Doors: Wood veneer with wood edge band.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

123530 - 3

Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Provide low VOC water based spray stain with water based high performance UV cured top coat finish. Urea formaldehyde free.

Defer only final touchup until after installation.

Where apartments are indicated to be ADA compliant provide factory fabricated, field removable cabinet fronts, shelving and base to provide the required accessible clearance.

Provide convertible ADA compliant clearances at kitchen sink, designated work counter and bathroom vanity.

Where range hood exhaust duct penetrates cabinet, provide duct enclosure of materials similar to cabinet construction. Seal all gaps. Provide matching duct enclosure to conceal exposed duct above cabinet.

CABINET HARDWARE

General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Pulls: Wire pulls. Nickel finish. ADA compliant.

Hinges: 110˚ concealed clip hinge with 6-way adjustability. Self-closing.

Drawer Glides: Epoxy coat standard extension side mount with 75 lb rating.

COUNTERTOPS MATERIALS

Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.


Formica Corp. Nevamar Company, LLC. Wilsonart International.

Grade: HGP.

Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash), backsplash, and endsplash style:

Front: No drip (raised marine edge with rolled front).

Cove: Cove molding (one-piece postformed laminate supported at junction of top and backsplash by wood cove molding).

Backsplash: Curved or waterfall shape with scribe.

Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Exterior-grade plywood not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.

Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional layers of plywood laminated to top.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

123530 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.

Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).

Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.

Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of coun-tertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose.

Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories.

Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Seal-ants."


Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly with-out warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore dam-aged or soiled areas.


SECTION 313116 – TERMITE CONTROL EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

313116 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Termiticide treatment of structure.

Physical stainless steel mesh termite barrier for installation around bath traps and utility penetrations.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of termite control product indicated. Include EPA-Registered Label for termiti-cide products.


Qualification Data: For licensed and manufacturer accredited installer.

Test Reports: Provide 5-year product specific efficacy studies and concrete application studies and applica-tion history.

Product Certificates.

Termiticide Treatment Report. Include the following:

Date and time of application. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. Dilutions, methods, volumes used and rates of application. Areas of application. Areas not accessible.

Physical Stainless Steel Mesh Barrier Report. Include the following:

Plan drawing showing locations of physical stainless steel mesh barrier. Shop drawings of mesh installation type to be used as described in 1. above. Physical barrier brand name and manufacturer.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdic-tion to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who em-ploys workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termite devices according to the EPA-Registered Label.

Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer.

Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

313116 - 2

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Coordinate installation of physical stainless steel mesh barriers around utility penetrations. Install barriers after installation and inspection of plumbing, electrical pipes, conduits, slab vapor barrier, and concrete slab reinforcement and prior to pouring concrete.

Coordinate application of termiticide treatment of structure with access to all structural framing members and foundations. Install termiticide during the dried-in phase after all structural framing and sheathing is in place and prior to installation of drywall, insulation, mechanical systems and electrical wiring.

WARRANTY

Special Warranty: Standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied termiticide treatment and physical barriers, will prevent infestation of subterranean and Formosan termites. Installer agrees to re-treat structure with termiticide treatments and/or repair or re-place damage where subterranean and Formosan termite activity is discovered during warranty period as directed by warranty.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

Nisus Corporation; 100 Nisus Drive; Rockford, TN 37853; Phone 800.264.0870; website www.nisuscorp.com

TERMITICIDE TREATMENT

Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.

Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Nisus Corporation; BORA-CARE® Commercial Termiticide, Insecticide and Fungicide.

Active Ingredient: 40% Disodium Octaborate Tetrahydrate (DOT) Penetrant: Patented Glycol mixture.

PHYSICAL STAINLESS STEEL MESH BARRIERS

Provide stainless steel mesh physical barriers complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer’s written standards and direction. Provide proper sizes for each specific use.

Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements; Termistop.

Mesh: Marine grade Type 725 stainless steel flexible mesh with wire diameter of 0.18mm and ap-erture size of 0.66mm x 0.45mm.

Clamps: Stainless steel only as provided by manufacturer


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

313116 - 3

ACCESSORY MATERIALS

As required by manufacturer for proper installation

PART 3 - EXECUTION

GENERAL

Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

Metal Protection: Where stainless steel mesh will contact dissimilar metals, protect against corrosion by ap-plying contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant materials as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

TERMITICIDE TREATMENT TO STRUCTURE APPLICATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for interfaces with slab and foundation work, utility installation and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.

Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Termiticide Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.

Application: Mix termiticide treatment solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for ap-plication at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label. Apply to the following areas so that a continuous horizontal and verti-cal termiticide barrier or treated zone is established at the foundation building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.

Structural Components and Sill Plates: Treat all structural concrete, steel & wood and sill plates up 24 inches from contact with foundation as required by label.

Sheathing: Treat all cellulosic sheathing up 24 inches from the foundation.

Concrete Slab: Treat concrete slab a minimum of 2 – 8 inches out from all sill plates.

Bath Traps: Treat open bath traps and surrounding 12 inches of slab area.

Penetrations: Treat all pipe and plumbing penetrations to a height of 24 inches and a minimum of 6 inches surrounding penetration.

Expansion Joint and Abutting Connections: Treat abutting slab areas and expansion joints a minimum of 6 inches out on each side of joint or abutting slab connection.

PHYSICAL STAINLESS STEEL MESH BARRIERS INSTALLATION

Install single flange physical stainless steel mesh barriers at all service penetrations of greater spacing than 4" between pipe outside diameter (O.D.) as follows:

Remove tape, insulation and other obstructions from service penetration. Enlarge clamp and slide over top of pipe. Position flange so it will be at the center of the slab.


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

313116 - 4

Apply corrosion-resistant material to steel reinforcing to prevent contact with flange. Secure barrier to penetration by tightening clamp. Lift flange so it is 15 degrees above horizontal. Replace tape, insulation and other materials at penetration to their original position and condition. Apply manufacturer provided identification tape above the concrete level to mark barrier locations. Inspect site to ensure all penetrations have been protected.

Install bath trap physical stainless steel mesh barriers at all bath block-outs as follows:

Remove block-out, tape, and other obstructions from pipe. Ensure surface of pipe is clean. Place bath trap barrier on top of pipe. Press clamp down on mesh and tighten at top of pipe. Cut an “X” in the center of the pipe clamp, ensuring to cut with the grain of the mesh. Fold each tab at the “point” and fold it in half. Fold tabs again to fold over clamp. Loosen clamp and lower bath trap barrier to surface of vapor barrier or pad. Secure bath trap barrier in place by tightening clamp. Replace block-out, tape and other materials to original positions and conditions. Fold up edges of bath trap barrier.

Install stainless steel mesh barrier to multiple pipes, clusters or manifolds of less than 4" spacing between pipe O.D. as follows:

Remove tape, insulation and other obstructions from service penetration. Enlarge clamps and slide over top of pipes in cluster to measure distance between pipes for folds. Overlap clamps on pipes, then remove and position back to back and fold and crimp overlapped mesh to unite clamps Continue procedure for all clamps in the cluster Position flange so it will be at the center of the slab. Apply corrosion-resistant material to steel reinforcing to prevent contact with flange. Secure barrier to penetration by tightening clamps. Lift flange so it is 15 degrees above horizontal. Apply manufacturer provided identification tape above the concrete level to mark barrier locations.

Observe installation of concrete to insure integrity of the physical barriers.

PHYSICAL BARRIERS PROTECTION

Protect installed physical barriers before, during and after the work of all trades. Repair physical barriers when damaged or moved.


SECTION 323113 – CHAIN LINK FENCES EUNICE 16 APARTMENTS

EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

10 AUGUST 2015

313116 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

FENCE COMPONENTS

Fabric: Metallic-coated steel, 2-inch (50-mm) mesh, 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-).

Selvage: Knuckled on both selvages.

Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe complying with ASTM F 1043 requirements for light industrial fence.

Tension Wire: Metallic-coated steel, ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824.

Fittings and Accessories: ASTM F 626 and as follows:

Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight cap for each post. Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.

Post Brace Assembly: Same material as top rail with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter rod and adjustable tightener.

Bottom and Center Rail: Same material as top rail with cap on each end.

Privacy Slats: PVC, UV-light stabilized, not less than 0.023 inch (0.58 mm) thick, sized to fit mesh specified for direction indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567.

Excavation: Drill post holes 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter and 42 inches (1.02 m) in depth, equally spaced, but not more than 10 feet (3.05 m) apart.

Setting Posts: Set posts in holes approximately 4 inches (102 mm) above bottom of excavation. Align posts vertically and align tops. Pour concrete footings with tops 2 inches (50.8 mm) above grade, troweled to a crown to shed water.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

STRUCTURAL


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


REV. 12/20/13 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 1

SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes formwork for cast-in-place concrete, including water stops, and installation of embedded items.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03 20 00 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00

C. Under-Slab Vapor Retarder – Section 07 26 00

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the American Concrete Institute Standard, ACI 347-04, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 226-09 Specification for Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing"

2. ASTM D 1751-04 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood complying with Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-07 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better or metal, metal-framed plywood or other acceptable panel-type materials. Plywood shall be mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Use plywood, lumber, metal or other

acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.


C. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

D. Chamfer Strips: ¾ inch by ¾ inch wood, PVC, or rubber. E. Preformed Construction Joint: 24-gage steel, galvanized, shaped to form a

continuous tongue and groove key. F. Preformed Control Joint: Rigid plastic or metal strip with removable top section. G. Expansion Joint Material: Asphalt saturated fiberboard, ½ inch thick, meeting the

requirements of ASTM D 1751.

H. Felt: Asphalt-saturated organic felt, weighing 30 pounds per 100 square feet, meeting the requirements of ASTM D 226.

I. Recycled Content: Minimum 5 percent post-consumer content, or minimum 20

percent pre-consumer recycled content at contractor’s option. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. Set screeds accurately. Embedded items shall be accurately aligned and adequately supported. Verify installation of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical items to be embedded in concrete. Correct any unsatisfactory condition before proceeding further.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Form Coating: Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Thin form-coating compounds with thinning agent and apply as specified in manufacturer's instructions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Formwork: Formwork shall support vertical and lateral loads that are applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Formwork shall be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown. Perform surveys to obtain accurate alignment. Provide for recesses, chamfers, blocking, anchorages, inserts, and other features required in work. Select materials to obtain required finishes. Butt joints solidly and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

B. Chamfer Strips: Provide at exposed corners and edges.

C. Form Ties: Use factory fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off

metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.


D. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to

receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set anchorage devices and other embedded items accurately. Use setting drawings, diagrams, templates and printed instructions provided by supplier. Secure embedded items such that they are not displaced during placement of concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless noted otherwise.

B. Keyways: Provide keyways at least 1-½ inch deep in construction joints in walls

and slabs.

C. Preformed Construction Joint For Slabs on Grade: Secure with galvanized steel stakes, 1/8 inch thick by 1-1/8 inches wide with ½ inch deep rib and tapered point. Splice adjoining joints with 24 gage steel, galvanized splice plates.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs on Grade: Construct isolation joints in interior slabs

using 30 lb. felt. Provide isolation joints at points of contact between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. Construct isolation joints on exterior slabs abutting vertical surfaces with ½ inch thick expansion joint material.

E. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:

1. Preformed Strip: Insert premolded rigid plastic, or metal strip into fresh

concrete. Cut groove for strip using 10-foot long straight edge cutting tool. Depths of strip shall be one fourth of slab thickness. Press strip into groove such that top of strip is level with the concrete surface. Pull off removable top section, if any, prior to troweling.

2. Saw Cut: Contractor may saw cut control joints instead of using

preformed strips. Saw cut joints shall be 1/8 inch wide. Saw cut depth should equal 1/3 of slab depth. Cut joints after concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling; usually 4 to 12 hours after slab has been cast and finished. Use diamond or silicone-carbide blades.

F. Control Joints in Walls: Create weakened planes in cantilevered retaining walls

at 25 feet on center. Use preformed strips, placed vertically, full height in each face of wall. Depth of strips shall be one inch.

3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK


A. General: Prevent excessive deflection, distortion, and damage to concrete when forms are stripped. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.

B. Formwork and supports at sides of concrete shall remain in place for 24 hours

after concrete placement. This period represents cumulative number of hours, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete is above 50 degrees F. Formwork and shoring which support the weight of concrete shall not be removed until concrete has attained its specified compressive strength.

C. Ensure safety of the structure. Do not superimpose any load on concrete until

forms are removed and concrete is cured. 3.7 RE-USE OF FORMS

A. General: Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in work. Split, frayed,

delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable

for exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new

formwork.

When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean

surfaces and remove fins and latence. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.

Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces.

END OF SECTION 03 10 00

REV. 12/20/13 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes fabrication and installation of deformed bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing steel.


A. Concrete Forming and Accessories - Section 03 10 00. B. Cast In Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00.


A. Reference Standards:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

a. ACI 301-05 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

b. ACI 315-99 Details and Detailing of Concrete

Reinforcement

c. ACI 318-05 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a. ASTM A 82/ Standard Specification for Steel Wire, plain,

A82M-07 for Concrete Reinforcement b. ASTM A 185/ Standard Specification for Steel Welded

A185M-07 Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

c. ASTM A 615/ Standard Specification for Deformed and A 615M-09b Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). Design Handbook - 2002

Edition 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel. Comply with ACI 315 requirements showing layout, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of reinforcing steel. Shop Drawings shall not be made by reproduction of the Contract Drawings.



A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Stirrups and ties may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheets.

C. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gage.

D. Supports for Reinforcing Steel: Wire bar type and precast concrete block type

meeting the requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with fabricating tolerances in ACI 315. B. Do not fabricate reinforcing steel until shop drawings are approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING BAR SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide bar supports meeting the requirements of CRSI Specification for Placing Bar Supports.

B. Slabs-on-grade: Use supports with sand plates or precast concrete blocks or

horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL

A. General: Comply with CRSI Code of Standard Practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars".

B. Clean reinforcing steel of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other

materials, which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcing steel against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Place reinforcing steel to obtain minimum coverages. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcing steel in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

Concrete Cover: Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3 inches Concrete exposed to earth or weather: Bars larger than No. 5 2 inches Bars No. 5 or smaller. 1 ½ inches

D. Rebar Splices: Locate at points of minimum stress or as shown on contract drawings. Unless noted otherwise, provide lap splices 30 bar diameters (18 inches minimum) in length.


E. Welded Wire Fabric Splices: Lap one complete wire spacing.

F. Corner Reinforcing: Provide corner bars of same size and spacing as horizontal

reinforcing steel. Lap with horizontal reinforcing 30 bar diameters or 18 inches minimum length.

G. Reinforcing at Construction/Control Joints: Continue reinforcing steel through

construction joints unless noted otherwise. Discontinue reinforcing steel 2 inches from preformed construction joints in slabs-on-grade. Cut alternate longitudinal bars at weakened plane control joints in walls.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


REV.12/20/13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section covers cast-in-place concrete including finishing, surface repair and curing.


A. Concrete Forming and Accessories - Section 03 10 00 B. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03 20 00

C. Under Slab Vapor Retarder – Section 07 26 00


A. Reference Standards: Meet the requirements of the following codes, specifications and standards.

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications;

a. ACI 301-05 Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings b. ACI 306.1-90 Standard Specification for Cold Weather

Concreting

c. ACI 318-05 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

2. ASTM International (ASTM);

a. ASTM C 31/ Standard Practice for Making and C31M-10 Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field

b. ASTM C 33/ Standard Specification for Concrete C33M-11a Aggregates c. ASTM C 39/ Standard Test Method for Compressive C39M-11a Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

d. ASTM C 94/ Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed C 94M-11b Concrete e. ASTM C 131-06 Standard Test Method for Resistance to

Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine


f. ASTM C 136-06 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of

Fine and Coarse Aggregates

g. ASTM C 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of C 143M-10a Hydraulic Cement Concrete

h. ASTM C 150/ Standard Specification for Portland Cement C150M-11 i. ASTM C 171-07 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials

for Curing Concrete

j. ASTM C 172/ Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly C172M-10 Mixed Concrete

k. ASTM C 173/ Standard Test Method for Air Content of C 173M-10b Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric

Method

l. ASTM C 231/ Standard Test Method for Air Content of C231M-10 Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method m. ASTM C 260/ Standard Specification for Air Entraining C260M-10a Admixtures for Concrete

n. ASTM C 309-11 Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

o. ASTM C 330/ Standard Specification for Lightweight 330M-09 Aggregates for Structural Concrete

p. ASTM C 494/ Standard Specification for Chemical C 494M-11 Admixtures for Concrete q. ASTM C 567-05a Standard Test Method for Determining

Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete r. ASTM C 618-08a Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and

Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

s. ASTM D 4318-10 Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit,

Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

B. Environmental Requirements: Manufacturer and Contractor shall conform to Federal, State, and Local V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) Regulations in area where Project is located. Notify A/E in writing if variations to Specifications herein are required.

1. V.O.C. content shall be a maximum 250 (55) gm/liter, unless more

stringent codes or laws apply.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and admixtures.

B. Concrete Mix Design:

1. Submit mix design in accordance with ACI-301, Section 4.

2. Submit with mix design results of laboratory tests performed within

previous 6 months indicating aggregates from the proposed source comply with the requirements of ASTM C 33 or C 330 as applicable.

3. Submit the proposed area of use for each mix design submitted (footings,

stemwalls, slabs, walls, columns, etc.).

C. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports for concrete compressive strength, air content, temperature and slump. Submit copies of granular base course test reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Environmental Requirements: Manufacturer and Contractor shall conform to

Federal, State, and Local V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) Regulations in area where Project is located. Notify A/E in writing if variations to Specifications herein are required.

1. V.O.C. content shall be a maximum 250 (55) gm/liter, unless more

stringent codes or laws apply.


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali. Use one brand of cement throughout project.

B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. Provide aggregates from a single

source for exposed concrete.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494.


F. Fly-Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

G. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Provide waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or polyethylene-coated burlap meeting the requirements of ASTM C 171.

H. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming

curing compound meeting the requirements of ASTM C 309; Type 1-D with fugitive dye for interior concrete and foundations; Type 2, white pigmented, for exposed exterior concrete except exposed exterior Architectural concrete, use Type 1-D.

Curing compound shall NOT be used on interior slabs.

I. Vapor Retarder shall comply with Section 07 26 00 of these Specifications.

2.2 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial mixture or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301, Section 4. If trial mixture method is used, employ an independent testing facility, acceptable to Architect, for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

B. Submit written reports to Architect, or Engineer, of each proposed mix for each

class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been approved.

C. Refer to the General Structural Notes for concrete strengths.

D. Slabs-on-ground or on vapor retarder shall have a water/total cementitious ratio

not to exceed 0.45.

E. Admixtures 1. Use water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C 494, Type A, in all

concrete unless approved otherwise by the Structural Engineer.

2. All other admixtures shall have the written approval of the Architect or Structural Engineer.

3. Calcium chloride is not permitted.

4. All admixtures, except high range water reducers, shall be added to the

concrete at the batch plant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement

of forms and reinforcing steel. Set screeds accurately. Embedded items shall be accurately aligned and adequately supported. Verify installation of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical items to be embedded in concrete. Correct any unsatisfactory condition before proceeding further.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before placing concrete, clean and roughen surface of previously placed concrete. Clean reinforcing steel. Remove debris, providing clean-outs at bottom of forms when necessary. Moisten surfaces to receive concrete unless otherwise prepared. Remove excess water before placing concrete.

3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with ACI 301.

B. Place concrete continuously in layers not deeper than 24 inches. Concrete shall not be placed against concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete.

C. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.

D. Consolidate concrete, immediately after placing, by mechanical vibrating

equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.

E. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats

or darbies to smooth surface. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

F. Cold Weather Concreting: Protect concrete work from physical damage or

reduced strength caused by frost, freezing or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1.

G. Hot Weather Concreting: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair

quality and strength of concrete, reduce delivery time of ready mix concrete, lower the temperature of materials, or add retarder to ensure that the concrete is plastic. Retempering with water is not allowed. Comply with ACI 305R.

3.4 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: Provide where formed concrete surfaces are not exposed to view. Tie holes and surface imperfections shall be repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding ¼ inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

3.5 FINISH OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES

A. At tops of foundation walls and grade beams finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 SLAB FINISHES

A. Float Finish: Begin floating when surface water has disappeared and when

concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven or hand floats. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a


tolerance not exceeding ¼ inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge.

B. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to slab surfaces that are to receive floor

topping. Roughen surface before final set, using stiff brushes, or brooms.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to all slab surfaces unless noted otherwise. After floating, begin first trowel finish using a power-driven or hand trowel. Finish concrete surface by a final hand-trowel operation, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. The final surface finish for slabs-on-grade shall have a minimum FF = 25 and a minimum FL = 20.

D. Broom Finish: Apply on exterior slabs, ramps, steps, and sidewalks. Immediately

after concrete has received a float finish, draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to give a coarse transverse scored texture.

3.7 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Continue curing for at least 7 days.

B. Moisture-retaining Cover curing: All interior concrete slabs, except exposed

integrally colored concrete slabs, are to be cured with a moisture retaining cover for the first 7 days. After that time, the cover shall be removed and the slab should be allowed to dry. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed. Repair any holes or tears in cover during curing period.

C. Curing compound: At contractor’s option, exterior concrete slabs may be cured

using curing compound. All vertical concrete (walls, beams, etc…) shall be cured using curing compound – apply compound to the vertical surface as soon as the forms are removed. Apply curing compound uniformly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Curing compound shall NOT be used on interior slabs, except exposed integrally colored concrete slabs.

D. Exposed integrally colored concrete slabs: Use curing compound recommended

by the concrete supplier. Apply with and airless sprayer. 3.8 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Surface Imperfections: Remove loose material and patch surface imperfections and holes left by tie rods with cement mortar. Surface imperfections include honeycomb, excessive air voids, sand streaking and cracks.

3.9 FOR EXPOSED-TO-VIEW SURFACES

A. Blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.


3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Owner shall employ the services of a qualified testing laboratory to perform tests and submit test reports.

B. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172.

C. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each set of compressive strength test

specimens.

D. Air Content: ASTM C 173 or C 231 for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

E. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and

below, when 80 degrees F and above; and when compression test specimens are made.

F. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31, one set of 4 standard cylinders for

each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field cure test specimens are required. Mold one set of standard cylinders for volume of concrete specified below or fraction thereof.

1. Slabs on Grade 50 cubic yards 2. Footings and stem walls 50 cubic yards 3. All other locations (unless noted otherwise) 50 cubic yards

G. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test 1 specimen at 7 days, 2

specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing. Additional Tests: The testing laboratory will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure as directed by the Architect. The testing laboratory may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by the Architect or Engineer. The Owner shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


8/10/15 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 10 00-1

SECTION 05 10 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes the fabrication and erection of structural steel. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications of Field Welders: Welders shall be certified in accordance with AWS D1.1 within the last 12 months.

B. Reference Standards:

1. ASTM International (ASTM)

a. ASTM A 36/ Standard Specification for Carbon Structural A36M-08 Steel b. ASTM A 53/ Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black A 53M-10 and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless c. ASTM A 61/ Standard Specification for General A6M-11 Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. d. ASTM A 307-10 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel

Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

e. ASTM A 325-10 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,

Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

f. ASTM A 490-11 Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy

Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

g. ASTM A 500/ Standard Specification for Cold-Formed A500M-10a Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes h. ASTM A 992/ Standard Specification for Structural Steel A 992M-11 Shapes i. ASTM C 1107/ Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, C1107M-11 Hydraulic-Cement Grout (non-shrink) j. ASTM F1554-07ae1 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.


2. American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition.

a. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code-Steel

3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Steel Construction

Manual, latest edition.

a. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings b. AISC Code of Standard Practice c. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490

Bolts. 1.SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including erection plans, complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Shop drawings shall not be made by reproduction of the Contract Drawings.

B. Provide setting drawings and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other

anchorages to be installed by others. C. Welder Certification: Submit affidavit stating that all welders are certified in

accordance with AWS and provide copies of welder’s certificates. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Support structural steel above ground on skids, pallets, platforms, or other supports.

B. Protect steel from damage. C. Store packaged materials in original unbroken package or container. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. E. Replace damaged shapes or members.

F. Waste Management and Disposal; As specified in Division 01 Section

“Construction Waste Management” and as follows: Collect cut offs and scrap and place in designated area for recycling in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and local recycler standards.


A. All Angles, Channels, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.


B. Rectangular or Square Hollow Structural Section: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36

D. High Strength Tension Control Threaded Fasteners: Meet requirements of ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490.

E. Headed Anchor Shear Studs: By the Nelson Division of TRW.

F. Welding Electrodes: E 70 Series.

G. Shop Primer Paint: Fabricators standard rust inhibitive primer.

H. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Meets the requirements of ASTM C 1107.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges".

B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections as indicated on the approved shop

drawings. Design connections to support reactions and forces where indicated on the drawings.

C. Shop Welds: Shall be visually inspected by the Fabricator’s quality control

department. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete, mortar or to receive sprayed on fireproofing. Paint embedded steel, which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inch of embedded areas only.

B. Do not paint surfaces, which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with

friction-type connections.

C. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning" 2. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" 3. [SP-3 “Power Tool Cleaning”. For Architecturally Exposed Structural

Steel, AESS, see Architectural drawings for locations.]

D. Painting: After surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide one coat.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION

A. Field Measurements: Verify all elevations, locations, and dimensions of surfaces to receive structural steel.

B. Anchor Bolts and Other Embedded Items: Verify locations and positions of

anchor bolts and other embedded items used to support structural steel. All Anchor bolts for column base plates, anchors and bearing plates for beams shall be located prior to installation by a Registered Professional surveyor. The Professional Surveyor shall use project control points, such as bench marks, grid lines, or building corners established and accurately maintained by the General Contractor for vertical and horizontal control of location. Templates shall be used to locate groupings of bolts or anchors and shall be confirmed as to orientation and hole geometry accuracy. Anchor bolts and bearing plates with anchors shall be stabilized against movement, vertical and horizontal, prior to and during concrete casting of concrete supporting these devices. Upon completion of the concrete casting the Professional Surveyor shall verify vertical and horizontal locations and orientation of anchor bolts or bearing plates with anchors. A report shall be furnished the Engineer of Record (through the General Contractor and Architect) noting non compliant locations. The EOR, will furnish remedial actions required to correct the non compliant anchor bolt or bearing plate locations. Allow ten days for the EOR's report on remedial actions necessary. It shall be the General Contractor's responsibility to have this work performed.

C. Correct any unsatisfactory conditions prior to erection of structural steel. 3.2 PREPARATION

B. Clean surfaces to receive structural steel prior to erection. 3.3 ERECTION

A. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

B. Field Assembly: Assemble structural steel accurately to the lines and elevations

shown on the drawings. Align and adjust components accurately before fastening.

C. Temporary Bracing: Provide temporary bracing or guys to secure structural steel

against wind, seismic, or construction loads. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain stability of the structure during erection.

D. Field Bolted Connections: Install high strength tension control bolts in

accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts and the manufacturer's instructions. Where clearance within a connection does not permit the use of tension control bolts, standard A325 bolts


shall be used and inspected in accordance with the AISC Specification for Structural Joints.

E. Field Welding: Perform all welds in accordance with AWS.

F. Inspection of Field Welds: Perform visual inspection of all field welds. If any

welds appear to be unsatisfactory, they shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E160 and/or replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

G. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas-cutting torches in field to cut structural framing. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes by burning. Ream holes that must be enlarged to

admit bolts. I. Field Touch-up Painting (Primer): Paint all exterior exposed bolts, washers, and

nuts after connections have been tightened and checked. Paint all exterior exposed field welds. Paint all exterior exposed abrasions in shop coat. Use same paint as for shop painting.

J. Grout Placement: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions. K. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed.



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


8/10/15 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install all structural plywood, blocking, supports, non-structural nailers, and stripping as required for securing other work, shown on Drawings. Furnish all hardware, miscellaneous rough carpentry and related accessories as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein for a complete installation.


A. Codes and Standards: All lumber shall conform to all requirements of the International Building Code. All framing lumber and plywood shall be appropriately grade marked with an agency certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review for lumber or the American Plywood Association for plywood.

B. Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate location of blocking with other related

trades. Other Contractors will furnish exact locations of grounds and blockings to this Contractor for proper installation of their Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's product data indicating specifications and installation requirements for rough hardware items specified, i.e., connectors, joist hangers, etc.

B. Letters: Submit letter of compliance that all lumber is grade-marked in

compliance with specified products and that lumber is of species and fiber stress specified.


A. Lumber:

1. Standard Grade Hem-Fir: Non-structural furring, concealed blocking and stripping, and miscellaneous nailers, grade marked with WWPA stamp.

B. Framing Lumber:

1. Studs, sills, plates, ledgers, stiffeners, bridging, etc. Size and spacing as

indicated and as required, shall be:

8/10/15 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2

Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir: Grade No. 2 or better

Fb = 875 psi Ft = 450 psi Fv = 70 psi Fc = 425 psi perpendicular to grain Fc = 725 psi parallel to grain Ec = 1,300,000 psi

2. Wood members 2" to 4" thick, 5" and wider.

Species: Hem-Fir: Grade No. 1 or better


3. Beam and Stringers.

Species: Hem-Fir: Grade No. 1 or Douglas Fir-Larch: Dense No. 2


C. Plywood:

1. Roof and Wall Sheathing: APA Structural I.

D. Fasteners:

1. Nails: Meeting the requirements of ASTM F1667

a. Common wire nails. Use galvanized box nails where rough

carpentry is exposed to moisture. b. Non-corrosive finish nails of either stainless steel, aluminum or

high quality hot-dipped galvanized shall be used on all exposed decorative lumber and redwood flooring.

2. Bolts: ASTM A307-94 “Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and

Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength,” galvanized for exterior connections. Use washers under all heads where in contact with wood; use washers under all nuts. Bolts shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASME Standard B18.2.1.

3. Screws: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Standard B18.6.1.

8/10/15 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3

4. Connectors, Joist Hangers, Anchors, Etc.: Type and size to meet job conditions and as indicated on the Drawings, or as required, as manufactured by Simpson Co., San Leandro, California 94577 or acceptable substitution.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and securely fasten wood nailing strips, plates, blocking, etc., at proper levels in stud partitions, to anchor all items which require use of wood blocking to fasten or support components and accessories, and as nailers used in conjunction with roofing membrane, sheet metal and flashing and roofing accessories.

B. Workmanship and General Framing

1. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Carefully select all members, selecting pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts, nailing or making connections. Lumber may be rejected by Architect, whether or not is has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.

2. Shimming: Do not shim sills, joists, short studs, trimmers, headers,

lintels, or other framing components. 3. Framing: Set all horizontal or sloped members with crown up. Do not

notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, ducts, conduits, or other reasons except as indicated on Drawings or approved by Architect.

4. Bearings: Make all bearings full unless indicated otherwise. Finish all

bearing surfaces on which structural members are resting to give sure and even support. Where framing members slope, cut or notch ends as required for uniform bearing surface.

5. Blocking: Install all blocking required to support all items of finish and to

cut off all concealed draft openings, both vertical and horizontal, between ceiling and floor areas. Fire stops shall be two (2) inches (nominal) thick, by full width of opening being blocked. Provide fire stop in accordance with the Uniform Building Code, Chapter 25.

6. Bridging: Cross bridging shall be of not less than two (2) inches by three

(3) inches nominal wood or of metal cross bridging of equal strength. Space lines of bridging at eight (8) feet max.

7. Nailing:

a. All nailing shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings.

b. For conditions not covered in the Contract Drawings, provide penetration into piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail or spike.

8/10/15 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4

c. Do all nailing without splitting wood. Pre-bore as required. Replace all split members at Contractor's expense.

8. Bolting: Drill holes 1/16 inch larger in diameter than bolts being used.

Drill straight and true from one side only.

a. Bolt threads shall not bear on wood. Use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood. Use washers under all nuts.

9. Screws: Pre-bore holes in accordance with the National Design

Specification for Wood Construction.

10. Provide a 1/8” nominal joint between all plywood wall, floor, and roof panels.


8/10/15 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER FOR CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE 07 26 00 - 1

SECTION 07 26 00

UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER FOR CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Products Supplied Under This Section

1. Vapor Retarder, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots for installation under concrete slabs.


A. Cast-in-place Concrete - Section 03 30 00

B. Concrete Forming and Accessories - Section 03 20 00

C. Earthwork for Building Construction - Section 31 23 11

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 96/ Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor E96M-10 Transmission of Materials 2. ASTM E 154-08a Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor

Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs

3. ASTM E 1643-11 Standard Practice for Selection, Design,

Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

4. ASTM E 1745-11 Standard Specification for Plastic Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 302.2R-06, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control / Assurance

1. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 2. Independent laboratory test results showing compliance with ASTM & ACI

Standards.


3. Manufacturer’s samples, literature 4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and pipe

boot installation B. Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers

and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

2. Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. 3. Stack membrane on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate

warping. 4. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or

contamination. 5. Ensure membrane is stamped with manufacturer’s name, product name

and membrane thickness at intervals of no more than 85” (220 cm).

C. Environmental requirements

1. Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the elements.

2. Do not apply on frozen ground.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder (Performance-Based Specifications)

1. Vapor Retarder must have the following qualities at minimum and meet floor finish manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

a. Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E1745: Meets or exceeds Class A b. Maximum Permeance ASTM E96: 0.01 Perms or as required to

meet Flooring Manufacturer’s Warranties. c. Tensile Strength ASTM E154, Section 9: not less than 45 LBS.

Force/Inch d. Puncture Resistance ASTM D1709, Method B. e. Thickness of Retarder (plastic) ACI 302.1R-96: Not less than 15

mils f. Material: Virgin Polyethylene or Polyolefin


2. Vapor Retarder Products, may be by one of the following manufacturers or an approved equal, as long as the requirements above are met.

a. Epro, http://eproserv.com b. Fortifiber, http://www.fortifiber.com c. Stego Industries, http://www.stegoindustries.com d. W.R. Meadows, http://www.wrmeadows.com e. Raven Industries, http://www.vaporblock.com f. Reef Industries, http://www.reefindustries.com g. Insulation Solutions, http://www.insulationsolution.com

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam Tape

1. Tape must have the following qualities:

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower B. Vapor Proofing Mastic

1. Mastic must have the following qualities:

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower C. Pipe Boots

1. Construct pipe boots from vapor Retarder material, pressure sensitive

tape and/or mastic per manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Ensure compaction requirements have been completed and geotechnical firm has confirmed compaction requirements have been met. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install Vapor Retarder:

http://eproserv.com/

http://www.fortifiber.com/

http://www.stegoindustries.com/

http://www.wrmeadows.com/

http://www.vaporblock.com/

http://www.reefindustries.com/

http://www.insulationsolution.com/


1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643. a. Unroll Vapor Retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the

direction of the pour. b. Lap Vapor Retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls.

c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.

d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s

instructions.

e. No penetration of the Vapor Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Retarder,

overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.


8/17/15 EARTHWORK FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 31 23 11 - 1

SECTION 31 23 11

EARTHWORK FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appurtenances and material in performing all operations, hauling, placing, spreading, watering, processing, compacting and shaping earth sections, within the building limits, complete in place in accordance with the Project Manual and Drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE

A. Under-Slab Vapor Retarder – Section 07 26 00

B. General foundation notes on Drawings. In case of conflict or omission, the general foundation notes shall govern.

1.3 SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA

A. Subsurface soil investigations have been made and the results are available for examination by the Contractor. This is not a warranty of conditions, the Contractor is expected to examine the site and determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered.

B. No additional allowance will be made for rock removal, site clearing and grading,

filling, compaction, disposal, or removal of any unclassified materials. 1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International

1. ASTM D 1556-07 Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

2. ASTM D 1557-09 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))

3. ASTM D 4318-10 Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit,

and Plasticity Index of Soils

4. ASTM D 6938-10 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

1.5 SUBMITTALS


A. Submit copies of materials certificates and test results for materials in accordance with type of tests, frequencies and remarks as outlined in the sampling and testing schedule.

1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. General: The Owner shall employ the services of a registered, licensed Geotechnical Engineer to observe all controlled earthwork soil testing. The testing laboratory shall provide continuous on-site observation by experienced personnel during construction of fill material. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory at least two working days in advance of any field operations of controlled earthwork, or of any resumption of operations after stoppages.

B. Report of Field Density Tests

1. The Geotechnical Engineer shall submit, daily, the results of field density

tests required by these specifications.

C. Costs of Tests and Inspection

1. The cost of testing, inspecting and engineering, as specified in this section of the specifications, shall be borne by the Owner.

D. Lines and Grades: Alignment and grade of all elements shall be made on true

tangents and curves. Grades shall conform to the elevations indicated on Drawings, with minor adjustments, to provide a smooth approach at building lines, at connections to existing paving and to provide proper drainage. Correct irregularities at no cost to the Owner.

1.7 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

A. Controlled fill shall not be constructed when the atmospheric temperature is below 35 degrees F. When the temperature falls below 35 degrees, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to protect all areas of completed work against any detrimental effects of ground freezing by methods approved by the testing laboratory. Any areas that are damaged by freezing shall be reconditioned, reshaped, and compacted by the Contractor in conformance with the requirements of this specification without additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL

A. Material shall consist of soils that are approved by the on-site geo-technical engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clearing and Grubbing: Prior to placing structural fill all borrow areas and areas to receive structural fill shall be stripped of vegetation and deleterious materials. Strippings shall be hauled offsite or stockpiled for subsequent use in landscaped


areas or non-structural fill areas as designated by the Owner or his representative and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION AREA TREATMENT

A. Site Preparation - Fill Areas: Prior to placing structural fill the areas to be filled shall be scarified to a depth of ten inches and moisture conditioned as described below. The area to be filled shall then be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Any soft or "spongy" areas shall be removed as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer and replaced with structural fill as described herein.

B. Site Preparation - Cut Areas: Following excavation to rough grade all building

and pavement areas shall be scarified to a depth of ten inches and moisture conditioned as described below. All building and paved areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557.

3.3 EQUIPMENT AND METHODS

A. In areas not accessible to heavy equipment, distribute by and compact with hand operated vibratory compactors.

3.4 BORROW

A. The Contractor shall provide sufficient material for fill to the lines, elevations and cross sections as shown on the contract drawings from borrow areas.

B. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owners of said borrow areas the right to

excavate material, shall pay all royalties and other charges involved, and shall pay all expenses in developing the source including the cost of right-of-way required for hauling the material.

3.5 COMPACTION

A. Fill shall be spread in layers not exceeding 10 inches, watered as necessary, and compacted. Moisture content at time of compaction shall plus/minus 2 percent of optimum moisture. A density of not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density shall be obtained within the building pads.

B. Optimum moisture content and maximum dry density for each soil type used shall

be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

C. Compaction of the fill shall be by mechanical means only. Where vibratory compaction equipment is used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the vibrations do not damage nearby buildings or other adjacent property. Where vibratory compaction is not possible, pneumatic rolling equipment shall be used.

MINIMUM MATERIAL PERCENT COMPACTION

Structural & granular fill in construction area 95 Subgrade below structural fill 95 Structural fill under exterior walls 95


Miscellaneous backfill 90 3.6 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. The material, while being compacted, shall be within the moisture range of 2 percent below to 2 percent above optimum, well distributed throughout the layer.

3.7 DENSITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Density of undisturbed soils, in-place fill and backfill shall be determined in accordance with the procedures of ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938. If tests indicate that the density of in-place soil is less than required, the material shall be scarified, moistened or dried as necessary to obtain proper moisture content and recompacted as necessary to achieve the proper densities. Sufficient density tests shall be made and reports submitted by the Testing Laboratory indicating all cut and fill areas were compacted and graded in accordance with the requirements.

3.8 SLOPE PROTECTION & DRAINAGE

A. Berming and grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into and out of the construction area. Any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or by other methods.

3.9 SOIL EROSION PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall ensure that no soil erodes or blows from the site into public right-of-way or onto private property.

B. The Contractor shall promptly clean up any material which erodes or blows into

the public right-of-way or onto private property. 3.10 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY

A. Provide temporary fences, barricades, coverings, or other protections to preserve existing items indicated to remain and to prevent injury or damage to persons or property. Apply protections to adjacent properties as required.

B. Restore damaged work to condition existing prior to start of work, unless

otherwise directed. 3.11 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall verify the location of any utility lines, pipelines, or underground utility lines in or near the area of the work in advance of and during Earthwork. The Contractor is fully responsible for any and all damage caused by failure to locate, identify and preserve any and all existing utilities, pipelines and underground utility lines. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility owner at no expense to the Owner.

B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered

during grading, consult the Architect immediately for directions as to procedures.


C. Cooperate with the Owner and public or private utility companies in keeping service and facilities in operation.

3.12 WASTE

A. Dispose of all waste off Owner's property.

B. Burning of waste will not be permitted. 3.13 AIR POLLUTION

A. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt air pollution. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

SAMPLING AND TESTING SCHEDULE

FOR EARTHWORK

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

MATERIAL

TEST FOR

FREQUENCY

REMARKS NATURAL GROUND

Compaction in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938

1 per 500 square yards of surface

Conduct a minimum of 2 tests on each section.

EMBANKMENT AND/OR SUBGRADE

Soil Conditions Moisture-Density in accordance with ASTM D 1557

Test 1 per soil classification

Compaction control in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938

1 per each lift every 300 square yards of surface

Immediately after placing, Conduct a minimum of 2 tests per section

1 per each lift for each 300 cubic yards of fill



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

FIRE PROTECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 21 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQ

PART 1 GENERAL

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical

Engineers. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS Automatic Controls: Tags. Control Panels: Nameplates. Instrumentation: Tags. Major Control Components: Nameplates. Piping: Pipe markers. Thermostats: Nameplates. Valves: Nameplates and ceiling tacks where above lay-in ceilings.

NAMEPLATES Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. Letter Color: White. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. Background Color: Black. Thickness: 1/8 inch. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

TAGS Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background

color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

PIPE MARKERS Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe

covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed

markings. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6

inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. Color code as follows: Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.

CEILING TACKS Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

15042 / Eunice Appartments 21 05 53 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQ

PART 3 EXECUTION

PREPARATION Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

INSTALLATION Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient

adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to

equipment.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 21 13 00 - 1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Wet-pipe sprinkler system. Dry-pipe sprinkler system. Pre-action sprinkler system. System design, installation, and certification. Fire department connections.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves. Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 21 05 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog

information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.

Shop Drawings: Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with

ceiling installation. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and

accessories. Indicate system controls. Submit shop drawings to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. See Section 21 05 00 for additional information and PROJECT ENGINEERING PROCEDURE

requirements. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. See Division 1 for additional provisions. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA design

and installation standard. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to UL requirements. Designer Qualifications: per requirements of Section 21 05 00. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and

outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment: Tyco Fire Protection Products, a Tyco Business: www.tyco-fire.com. Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com. Or equal performance.

SPRINKLER SYSTEM Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building. Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. Design System [hydraulically] (in accordance with the current edition of) NFPA 13 or NFPA 13R. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. Provide fire department connections where indicated. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.

SPRINKLERS Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with matching screw on cover plate. Response Type: Quick. Coverage Type: Standard. Finish: Brass. Cover Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Exposed Area Type: Pendant type. Or equal performance. Response Type: Quick. Coverage Type: Standard. Finish: Chrome plated. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Sidewall Type: Recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. Response Type: Quick. Coverage Type: Standard. Finish: Chrome plated. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Dry Sprinklers: Concealed pendant type with matching push on estucheon plate. Response Type: Quick.


Coverage Type: Standard. Finish: Brass. Cover Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Residential Sprinklers: Concealed pendant type with matching push on cover plate. Response Type: Quick. Finish: Enamel, color as selected. Cover Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Storage Sprinklers: Pendant type with guard. Response Type: Standard. Coverage Type: Standard. Finish: Chrome plated. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish. Flexible Drop System: Stainless steel, multiple use, open gate type. Application: Use to properly locate sprinkler heads. Include all supports and bracing. Provide braided type tube as required for the application.

PIPING SPECIALTIES Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to

automatically actuate water motor alarm, pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim with the following additional capabilities and features:

Activate electric alarm. Test and drain valve. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to

automatically actuate water motor alarm, accelerator, and with the following additional capabilities and features:

Activate electric alarm. Test and drain valve. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy chrome plated gong

and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated gong with pressure alarm switch. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated 10 amp

at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. Fire Department Connections: Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of

matching material and finish. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection".

PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP Manufacturers: ______. ______. Or equal performance. Type: Close coupled motor and positive displacement pump unit.


Construction: Bronze with stainless steel shafts, carbon bearings. Motor: Open drip proof, permanently lubricated. Accessories: Include flexible hose connections. Operation: Automatic with pressure switch actuation.

AIR COMPRESSOR Compressor: Single unit, electric motor driven, motor, motor starter, safety valves, check valves, air

maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and unloader valve.

PREACTION SYSTEMS Double Interlock Preaction System, Electric/Electric Actuation: Where a Double Interlock Preaction

System, Electric/ Electric Actuation is specified, the valve assembly shall consist of the Tyco Model DV-5 and the Tyco Model CV-1FR Check Valve installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Actuation will occur after two independent events occur. Zone 1 of the Releasing Panel must operate upon automatic operation of the electric fire detection initiating circuit or operation of the electric manual pull initiating circuit, and Zone 2 of the Releasing Panel must operate via a Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch, equal to the Potter PS10A, upon loss of air pressure from the sprinkler system piping, due to operation of one or more sprinklers. The Double Interlock Preaction System will automatically actuate only when both Zone 1 and Zone 2 of the Releasing Panel have operated, energizing the Solenoid Valve. Preaction System trim shall be equipped with the Tyco Model MC-1 Manual Control Station providing a tamper resistant means for emergency release. Preaction System trim shall be galvanized, black, or brass. Preaction System trim and all trim/riser components shall be UL listed or FM approved for use with the preaction valve to which they are attached.

Single Interlock Preaction System, Wet Pilot Actuation: Where a Single Interlock Preaction System with Wet Pilot Actuation is specified, the valve assembly shall consist of a Tyco Model DV-5 Deluge Valve and a Tyco Model CV-1FR Check Valve installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Actuation will occur after the opening of a Wet Pilot sprinkler or remote pull station and the release water from the Deluge Valve diaphragm chamber. Water shall enter the system, but shall not discharge until system sprinkler activation. Preaction System trim shall be equipped with the Tyco Model ASV-1 Automatic Shut-Off Valve to prevent the diaphragm chamber from re-pressurizing the DV-5 Deluge Valve and from inadvertently closing. Preaction System trim shall be equipped with the Tyco Model MC-1 Manual Control Station providing a tamper resistant means for emergency release. Preaction System trim shall be galvanized or black. Preaction System trim shall be UL listed or FM approved for use with the Tyco Model DV-5 Preaction Valve.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide approved double check valve backflow preventer or reduced pressure backflow preventer

assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese

connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler

escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers. Install air compressor on vibration isolators.


Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated. Hydrostatically test entire system. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal.

INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 21 30 00 - 1 FIRE PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Fire pump package, including electric motor drive, controller, and accessories. System maintenance.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 21 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment. Section 21 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. Section 22 07 16 - Plumbing Equipment Insulation. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Fire protection piping. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

REFERENCE STANDARDS NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association. NFPA 20 - Standard for Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; National Fire Protection

Association. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. UL 448 - Centrifugal Stationary Pumps for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. UL 1478 - Fire Pump Relief Valves; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature including general assembly, pump curves showing

performance characteristics with pump and system, operating point indicated, NPSH curve, controls, wiring diagrams, and service connections.

Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, weights, clearances, and methods of assembly.

Certificates: Certify that fire pumps meet or exceed specified requirements at specified operating conditions and that the installation complies with regulatory requirements. Submit summary and results of shop tests performed in accordance with NFPA 20.

Test Reports: Indicate results of hydrostatic test and field acceptance tests. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate support details, connection requirements, for fire pump system. Maintenance Contract. Operation Data: Include manufacturers instructions, start-up data, trouble-shooting check lists, for pumps,

drivers, and controllers. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers literature, cleaning procedures, replacement parts lists, and

repair data for pumps, drivers and controllers. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. Extra Pump Gaskets/Screens/Seals: One set for each different pump model.

blinker

Cross-Out

blinker

Cross-Out


QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 20 and NFPA 13; where requirements differ comply with the most stringent. Maintain on site at all times one copy of each design and installation standard referenced. Design fire pump system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of

this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located. Equipment and Components: Bearing UL label or marking. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years

experience. approved by manufacturer.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver fire pumps and components in factory packing. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and

installation instructions. Protect fire pumps and components from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and

construction debris. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps, and maintain in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

FIRE PUMPS Fire Pumps: Vertical in-line type; UL 448 and UL 778; single stage, close coupled, radially or horizontally

split casing, for in-line mounting, for 250 psi. Casing: Cast or ductile iron, with suction and discharge gage port, casing wear ring, seal flush

connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed directly to motor shaft. Shaft: Solid alloy steel with bronze sleeve. Performance: Flow: 250 gpm, at 10 feet head. Motor: 10 hp, 240 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. Fire Pump Accessories: Eccentric suction reducer and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve on suction side of pump. Concentric increaser and check valve in pump discharge and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve on system

side of check valve. Fire pump bypass fitted with OS&Y gate or butterfly valves and check valve. Main relief valve, UL 1478, and enclosed type waste cone. Suction pressure gage, 4-1/2 inch diameter dial with snubber, valve cock and lever handle. Discharge pressure gage mounted on board attached to pump, with snubber, valve cock and lever

handle. 3/4 inch casing relief valve. Float operated 3/4 inch automatic air release valve. Hose valve manifold with 2-1/2 inch hose gate valves with caps and chains. Flow metering system for closed loop testing.

ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE Motor: Squirrel cage induction type, NEMA MG 1; in open drip proof NEMA 250 enclosure, 3500 rpm.

Refer to Section 22 05 13.


Controller: Limited service type with auto-transformer starter, in NEMA 250 enclosure, including the following:

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with NFPA 20. Provide access space around pumps for service; no less than minimum as recommended by

manufacturer. Install piping in accordance with Section 21 05 00. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing

elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge.

Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains. Mount unit on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 22 05 48. Insulate piping associated with pump, pump casing and exhaust silencer. Refer to Section 22 07 19 and

Section 22 07 16. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 27 17. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00. Perform field acceptance tests as specified in NFPA 20. Perform field acceptance tests in the presence of Fire Marshal.

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES Demonstrate automatic operation of system including verification of pressure switch set points.

MAINTENANCE See Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance

service. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service. Provide service and maintenance of equipment installed under this section for one year from the Date of

Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

PLUMBING


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 05 00 - 1 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

SUMMARY Section Includes: Plumbing Basic Requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 in addition to the

requirements of Division 1 - General Requirements and the General Conditions of the Contract. Electric motors. Plumbing Identification. Sleeves Plumbing sleeve seals. Altitude rating.

RELATED SECTIONS Work described in this section is related to other work described in Divisions 21, 22, 23, 27, and 28 and

may be related to work in other Divisions concerning structure or appearances. Review and become familiar with work required in other Sections in this Division and with work required in the other Divisions. Coordinate with other subcontractor(s) to assure that all issues arising between related Sections are resolved.

Bring to the attention of the Engineer prior to the cutoff date for Addenda, any and all discrepancies in related work. Submission of a bid or proposal indicates that all costs for this work and related work are included in the bid for this work or within the bid or proposal for the related work.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide complete and fully operational systems with facilities and services to meet requirements indicated

and in accordance with applicable codes and ordinances.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS All Plumbing work shall be performed in strict accordance with the New Mexico Building Codes, IBC,

UPC, UMC, NFPA, National Gas Code, Model Energy Code, and all applicable provisions of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate material or construction in excess of code requirements or visa-versa, the more stringent application shall govern.

SUBMITTALS Submit all data as a single package, as the Engineer will commence review only when all data has been

received. Submittal form to identify project, contractor, sub-contractor, supplier, and pertinent contract document

references. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review, verification of products required, field

dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and contract documents.

The Contractor shall determine and verify field measurements and field construction criteria for conformance with drawings and specifications and for conflicts with other items of construction, past or present. He shall coordinate each submittal with the requirements of the work and of the contract documents and notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of the submission, of any and all deviations in the submittals from requirements of the work and contract documents.

No fabrication or work, which requires submittals, shall begin until submittals are returned with the Engineer's approval.

Identify variations for contract documents and product or system limitations, which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.


Engineer's review does not constitute acceptance or responsibility for accuracy or dimensions, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from meeting any requirements of the work and contract documents, nor shall it constitute approval for any deviation from the contract documents, unless such deviations are specifically stated as such on the submittal and specifically allowed by the Engineer by specific written notification for each such variation. The Engineer's review will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings.

Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal.

SUBSTITUTIONS Prior approval of materials and equipment will not be considered. Contract documents indicate specified

equipment and acceptable alternatives. Any other equipment/material proposed must meet or exceed that specified. Equipment/material will be reviewed for compliance during submittal review process per Paragraph 1.5.

Engineer will consider requests for substitutions only at submittal review. Clearly identify substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with

contract documents. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor: Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the

specified product. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work, which may be required for the work to be

complete with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extensions which may, subsequently, become apparent. Will reimburse Owner and Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with re-approval

by authorities.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING In accordance with the requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

ELECTRIC MOTORS Motors shall be of sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed their full-rated load

when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity under the most severe conditions likely to be encountered.

Each motor shall be of the horsepower specified and suitable for operation at the elevation of the job site as scheduled on the drawings.

Motors shall conform to NEMA standards, applicable to IEEE Standards and ASA C50 Standards, and shall be suitable for direct coupling mounting or V-belt mounting in accordance with the drawings.

Motors controlled by variable frequency drives/adjustable frequency drives, “VFD/AFD”, shall be rated for use on “VFD/AFD” controllers.

PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION Equipment Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background

color. Valve Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color, minimum

1-1/2 inches diameter. Piping: Conform to ASME A13.1. Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.


Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

SLEEVES Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated beams, walls, footings, and potentially wet floors: steel pipe or 18

gage thick galvanized steel. Sleeves for round ductwork: galvanized steel. Sleeves for rectangular ductwork: galvanized steel or wood. Sealant: acrylic.

PLUMBING SLEEVE SEALS Modular Plumbing type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular

space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

ALTITUDE RATINGS Unless otherwise noted, all specified equipment capacities, air quantities, etc., are for the altitude of the

job site, as scheduled on the drawings, and adjustments to manufacturer's ratings must be made accordingly.

ACCESS PANELS Install wall and ceiling access panels for access to valves and water hammer arrestors in plumbing walls

or above hard ceiling. Coordinate location with architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION - IDENTIFICATION Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive. Install plastic tags with corrosion-resistant metal chain. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. Label piping at all changes in direction and at a minimum of every 20 feet of straight runs of pipe. Record actual location of valves on Project Record Documents.

INSTALLATION - CONDENSATE AND OVERFLOW DRAINS Install condensate and overflow drain piping from all mechanical equipment drain points. Extend and

terminate per UPC/UMC.

INSTALLATION - SLEEVES Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with Plumbing sleeve seals. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for

continuous insulation wrapping. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.


Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

Install chrome plated steel or, if allowed by the authority having jurisdiction, plastic escutcheons at finished surfaces.

EXISTING SERVICES The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and specifications, visit the site of the work, be fully

informed as to all existing conditions, dimensions, and limitations before starting work. If existing active or non-active services, which are not shown on plans, are encountered which require

relocation or disconnection, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for a decision on proper handling of these services. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until so authorized.

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL OF TRENCHES All excavation, trenching, and backfilling, as required for the Plumbing installation, shall be provided by

the Contractor. All piping laid in trenches shall be bedded evenly and firmly. The trench bed shall consist of undisturbed

native soil or shall be compacted to an equally firm bedding. Recesses shall be formed below the trench bed to receive the flange or hub off each section of pipe or fitting.

Where firm bedding is not obtainable, sand or gravel fill, compacted with water or low strength concrete fill around the bottom half of the pipe, shall be used.

Backfill all trenches as soon as possible after inspection. Spread backfill in layers, not to exceed 8 inches, and compact each layer to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum density based on Modified Proctor Density, in such areas as streets, driveways, alleys, or walks to prevent settling. Backfill shall be neither excessively wet or dry. Puddling or flooding shall not be used, except in sand or gravel-bearing soil, and as specifically approved. Street cuts shall be made 8 inches wider than required trenches and shall be repaired to match the finish surface of the street and be flush with existing grades.

Use plastic underground pipe markers for all buried piping.

PAINTING Surfaces of all equipment and material shall be thoroughly cleaned and left ready for painting. Painting shall be performed according to other specifications in these contract documents.

ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT All motor starters, disconnects overload protection equipment, and low voltage control equipment and

wiring specified under this Division will be the responsibility of this Contractor. Installation of line voltage components and wiring specified under this Division will be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. Purchase and installation of low voltage components and wiring specified under this Division will be this Contractor's responsibility.

The Plumbing contractor must coordinate with the electrical contractor on the division of responsibility pertaining to the purchase and installation of electrical control components. Any changes or additions required due to the specific nature of equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment.

All electrical work performed under this Division will be in compliance with the NEC and all applicable city and state ordinances. All controllers furnished with Plumbing equipment shall have overload protection on all phases.

The Plumbing contractor must coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure that all required components of control work are included and fully understood. No additional costs shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS Before substantial completion can be granted, the following items must be completed and submitted to

the Owner/Engineer:

15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Pipe Markers.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.


Engineers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PIPE MARKERS Comply with ASME A13.1. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe


markings. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6

inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. Color code as follows: Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.

PART 3 EXECUTION


INSTALLATION Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 07 19 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Piping insulation. Jackets and accessories.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless

Steel. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each

service, and locations. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and

installation standards will be achieved.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with not less than three years of documented experience.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.

FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

GLASS FIBER Manufacturers: Knauf Insulation; ______: www.knaufusa.com. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.


Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor

transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

JACKETS PVC Plastic. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M. Thickness: 10 mil. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. Finish: Smooth. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,

valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps

and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-

sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.


Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

Inserts and Shields: Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may

be factory fabricated. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for

the planned temperature range. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished

floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.

SCHEDULES Plumbing Systems: Domestic Hot Water Supply: Glass Fiber Insulation: Pipe Size Range: 1-3 inch. Thickness: 1 inch. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: Glass Fiber Insulation: Pipe Size Range: All sizes. Thickness: 1 inch.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 10 05 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. Sanitary sewer. Domestic water. Storm water. Gas.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot

Water Supply Systems. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical

Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18). ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society

of Mechanical Engineers. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014

(ANSI/ASME B31.9). ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating

Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASSE 1003 - Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems; The American

Society of Sanitary Engineering. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel

for Moderate and High Temperature Service. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy

Tube and Fittings. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping

Systems. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe

and Fittings. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.


ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works

Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants; American Water Works Association. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651). CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm

Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and

Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization

Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers

Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of

the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;

Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

SUBMITTALS See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project,

with design calculations for loadings and spacings. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water

certification, water pressure rating.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the

work, and isolating parts of completed system.


FIELD CONDITIONS Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply

with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034 DR 35. Fittings: PVC. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets. Trace Wire: Refer to Section 33 31 11.

SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and

oakum. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. Fittings: PVC. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.

WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING Copper Pipe (Cold or Hot Domestic Water): ASTM B42, hard drawn. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.

WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H). Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.


Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified,

utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.

STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.

STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.

STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.

PROPANE GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type, with AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or

double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded.

PROPANE GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type, with AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or

double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded.

PROPANE GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. Joints: NFPA 58, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.

FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene

gaskets. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with

continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket.

Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron, ductile iron, or _____, galvanized. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees F to 230

degrees F.


Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water

impervious isolation barrier.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS

SP-58 recommendations. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing membrane,

not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:

Bases: High density polypropylene. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with

ASTM A123/A123M. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent

indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.

GATE VALVES Up To and Including 3 Inches: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge

disc, solder or threaded ends. 2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc,

flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.

BALL VALVES Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze body, 304 stainless

steel ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends.

SWING CHECK VALVES Up to 2 Inches: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded

ends. Over 2 Inches: MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends.

SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style ends.

WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES Up to 2 Inches:


ASSE 1003, bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.

Over 2 Inches: ASSE 1003, cast iron body with interior lining complying with AWWA C550, bronze fitted, elastomeric

diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.

RELIEF VALVES Pressure Relief: AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure

actuated. Temperature and Pressure Relief: AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct

pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME BPVC-IV certified and labelled.

STRAINERS Size 2 inch and Under: Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated

screen. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Size 5 inch and Larger: Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

PREPARATION Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and

access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors

with Section 08 31 00. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.


Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and

flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Inserts: Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete

beams. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed

square steel plate and nut above slab. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without

disengagement of supported pipe. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal

piping. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze

hangers. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe

shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

APPLICATION Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.

DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 13 00. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or

acid (hydrochloric).


Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.

Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.

Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry,

and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

SERVICE CONNECTIONS Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer

connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 5 psi. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 10 06 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Roof and floor drains. Cleanouts. Hose bibbs. Backflow preventers. Water hammer arrestors. Interceptors. Thermostatic mixing valves.

REFERENCE STANDARDS 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities;

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASME A112.6.4 - Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004

(ANSI/ASSE 1011). ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society of Sanitary

Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012). ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection

Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering. ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American

Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019). NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute.

SUBMITTALS See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Material and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. Certificates: Certify that grease interceptors meet or exceed specified requirements. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and

support requirements. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Material and Methods, for additional provisions. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: One. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: One. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


with not less than three years documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three

years documented experience


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES See Section 01 10 00 Basic Requirements, paragraph 1.66 for specific project requirements for warranty

period and additional closeout procedures. See Section 22 08 00 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems for Project requirements. See Paragraph 3.08 this section for Substantial Completion and final Inspection Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for

maximum lead content.

DRAINS Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. Josam Company: www.josam.com. Noble Company; FreeStyle Linear Drain: www.noblecompany.com. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com. Or equal performance. All Drains: See plans for specifications.

CLEANOUTS Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. Josam Company: www.josam.com. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com. Or equal performance. All Cleanouts: See plans for specifications.

HOSE BIBBS Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com. Or equal performance. All Hose Bibbs: See plans for specifications.

HYDRANTS Manufacturers: Arrowhead Brass Company: www.arrowheadbrass.com. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com. Or equal performance. All Hydrants: See plans for specifications.


BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Manufacturers: Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com. Or equal performance. Description: See plans for specifications.

WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com. Or equal performance. Description: See plans for specifications.

MIXING VALVES Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Manufacturers: ESBE: www.esbe.se/en. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com. Honeywell Water Controls: http://yourhome.honeywell.com. Or equal performance. Description: See plans for specifications. Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves: Manufacturers: Delta Faucet Company: www.deltafaucet.com. H.G. Specialties: www.hgspec.com. Taconova: www.taconova.co.uk. Or equal performance. Description: See plans for specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Coordinate cutting or forming of roof or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of

graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic

water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.

Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply

piping to lavatories, sinks, and washing machine outlets.


Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 30 00 - 1 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Water heaters.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of

Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

SUBMITTALS See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment

and piping. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system

operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Shop Drawings: Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and

drains. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part

numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and

registered with manufacturer. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Extra Pump Seals: One of each type and size. Extra Water Softener Salt: 50 pounds.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this

section, with minimum three years of documented experience. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified by

permanently attached label. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

CERTIFICATIONS Water Heaters: NSF approved. Pressure Vessels for Heat Exchangers: ASME labeled, to ASME BPVC-VIII-1. Water Tanks: ASME labeled, to ASME BPVC-VIII-1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 30 00 - 2 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

WARRANTY See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods for additional warranty and closeout

requirements. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage. See drawings for specifications.

DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS Manufacturers: Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; supplied with

National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.

Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and

complying with conditions of certification, if any. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 40 00 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Dual flush water closets. Urinals. Lavatories. Service sinks. Electric water coolers. Drinking fountains.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American

Society of Mechanical Engineers. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

SUBMITTALS See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and

finishes. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and

registered with manufacturer. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for FMD's use in maintenance of project. Extra Faucet Washers: One set of each type and size. Extra Lavatory Supply Fittings: One set of each type and size. Extra Shower Heads: One of each type and size. Flush Valve Service Kits: 30 for each type and size.


section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to

protect fixtures and prevent use.

WARRANTY See Section 22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods for additional warranty and closeout

requirements.

15042 / Eunice Appartments 22 40 00 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

GENERAL Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for

maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

FIXTURES Water closets, urinals, lavatories, showers, bathtubs, service sinks, other sinks, and fittings: See plans for

specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories

and sinks.

PREPARATION Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in

schedule for particular fixtures.

INSTALLATION Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and

escutcheons. Install components level and plumb. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture.

INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and

installation.

ADJUSTING Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

CLEANING Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

PROTECTION Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

MECHANICAL


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 05 00 - 1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

SUMMARY Section Includes: Mechanical Basic Requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 in addition to the

requirements of Division 1 - General Requirements and the General Conditions of the Contract. Electric motors. Sleeves Mechanical sleeve seals. Altitude rating.

RELATED SECTIONS Work described in this section is related to other work described in Divisions 21, 22, 23, 27, and 28 and

may be related to work in other Divisions concerning structure or appearances. Review and become familiar with work required in other Sections in this Division and with work required in the other Divisions. Coordinate with other subcontractor(s) to assure that all issues arising between related Sections are resolved.

Bring to the attention of the Engineer prior to the cutoff date for Addenda, any and all discrepancies in related work. Submission of a bid or proposal indicates that all costs for this work and related work are included in the bid for this work or within the bid or proposal for the related work.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide complete and fully operational systems with facilities and services to meet requirements indicated

and in accordance with applicable codes and ordinances.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS All mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the New Mexico Building Codes, IBC,

UPC, UMC, NFPA, National Gas Code, Model Energy Code, and all applicable provisions of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate material or construction in excess of code requirements or visa-versa, the more stringent application shall govern.

Permits necessary for the performance of the work under this contract shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Final inspection by the Engineer will not be made, or certificate of final payment issued, until certificates of satisfactory inspection from the inspection authorities are delivered.





The Contractor shall determine and verify field measurements and field construction criteria for conformance with drawings and specifications and for conflicts with other items of construction, past or present. He shall coordinate each submittal with the requirements of the work and of the contract documents and notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of the submission, of any and all deviations in the submittals from requirements of the work and contract documents.

No fabrication or work, which requires submittals, shall begin until submittals are returned with the Engineer's approval.


Identify variations for contract documents and product or system limitations, which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.


Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. The Engineer will review a submittal and, if necessary, a resubmittal of the same item. Subsequent

resubmittals shall be accompanied by Contractor's purchase order to Engineer for Engineer's review time and costs at Engineer's standard hourly billing rates. These reviews will be performed at the convenience of the Engineer.

Provide eight (8) copies of materials for submittal review. If Contractor intends to utilize electronic submittals, one (1) hard copy must still be delivered to Engineer, hard copy will be dated when received and will be the official copy. Engineer will return submittal electronically.



Engineer will consider requests for substitutions only at submittal review. Clearly identify substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with



complete with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extensions which may, subsequently, become apparent. Will reimburse Owner and Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with re-approval

by authorities.

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit three (3) sets prior to final inspection, in 8-1/2" x 11" text pages, bound in three (3) D-side ring

binders with durable plastic covers. Provide one (1) set of original O&M Materials to Project Commissioning Authority no later than 30 days after submittals are approved. O&M package shall not be bound.

Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and title of project.

Internally sub-divide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced, laminated plastic tabs.

Contents: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Sub-

contractors, and major equipment suppliers. Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system. Project documents and certificates.



RECORD AS-BUILT DRAWINGS Maintain on site one set of record documents exclusively for the purpose of Record As-Built Drawings. Record into Record Drawings, Project Manual and Product Data, the actual “as-built” Work including all

revisions. Include actual location of all work. Record information concurrent with the construction progress. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future references by Owner. Modify reproducible drawings and two (2) sets of the project manual, delineating recorded as-built

conditions of the project or Record Documents compiled from the job records. The Contractor may obtain reproducible drawings from the office of the Architect or Engineer.

Provide electronic (.DWG or.PDF) files of “as-built” conditions. Contractor may obtain electronic drawings from the office of the Architect or Engineer and must modify the electronic record documents. The Contractor shall submit the as-built drawings in electronic format and printed drawings on the medium specified. The Contractor may request Engineer to complete modifications to drawings. Such request must be accompanied by Contractor’s purchase order to Engineer for drafting services.

Completion of Record As-Built Drawings is a condition of final inspection and consideration of final payment.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES See Division 1 for additional closeout procedures. See Paragraph 3.7 for Substantial Completion and Final Inspection Requirements.

FINAL INSPECTIONS One final inspection for completion of project will be performed by the Engineer. Any and all additional

inspections requested by the Contractor or required because of Contractor's failure to complete scope of work, shall be paid for by the Contractor. Costs for additional inspections shall be assessed at the Engineer's hourly rates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

ELECTRIC MOTORS Motors shall be of sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed their full-rated load

when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity under the most severe conditions likely to be encountered.

Each motor shall be of the horsepower specified and suitable for operation at the elevation of the job site as scheduled on the drawings.

Motors shall conform to NEMA standards, applicable to IEEE Standards and ASA C50 Standards, and shall be suitable for direct coupling mounting or V-belt mounting in accordance with the drawings.

Motors controlled by variable frequency drives/adjustable frequency drives, “VFD/AFD”, shall be rated for use on “VFD/AFD” controllers.

SLEEVES Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated beams, walls, footings, and potentially wet floors: steel pipe or 18

gage thick galvanized steel. Sleeves for round ductwork: galvanized steel. Sleeves for rectangular ductwork: galvanized steel or wood. Sealant: acrylic


MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill

annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

ALTITUDE RATINGS Unless otherwise noted, all specified equipment capacities, air quantities, etc., are for the altitude of the

job site, as scheduled on the drawings, and adjustments to manufacturer's ratings must be made accordingly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION - CONDENSATE AND OVERFLOW DRAINS Install condensate and overflow drain piping from all mechanical equipment drain points. Extend and

terminate per UPC/UMC.

INSTALLATION - SLEEVES Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for

continuous insulation wrapping. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and

adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

Install chrome plated steel or, if allowed by the authority having jurisdiction, plastic escutcheons at finished surfaces.

EXISTING SERVICES The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and specifications, visit the site of the work, be fully

informed as to all existing conditions, dimensions, and limitations before starting work. If existing active or non-active services, which are not shown on plans, are encountered which require

relocation or disconnection, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for a decision on proper handling of these services. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until so authorized.

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL OF TRENCHES All excavation, trenching, and backfilling, as required for the mechanical installation, shall be provided by

the Contractor. All piping laid in trenches shall be bedded evenly and firmly. The trench bed shall consist of undisturbed

native soil or shall be compacted to an equally firm bedding. Recesses shall be formed below the trench bed to receive the flange or hub off each section of pipe or fitting.

Where firm bedding is not obtainable, sand or gravel fill, compacted with water or low strength concrete fill around the bottom half of the pipe, shall be used.

Backfill all trenches as soon as possible after inspection. Spread backfill in layers, not to exceed 8 inches, and compact each layer to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum density based on Modified Proctor Density, in such areas as streets, driveways, alleys, or walks to prevent settling. Backfill shall be neither excessively wet or dry. Puddling or flooding shall not be used, except in sand or gravel-bearing soil, and as specifically approved. Street cuts shall be made 8 inches wider than required trenches and shall be repaired to match the finish surface of the street and be flush with existing grades.

Use plastic underground pipe markers for all buried piping.


PAINTING Surfaces of all equipment and material shall be thoroughly cleaned and left ready for painting. Painting shall be performed by others, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.

ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT All motor starters, disconnects overload protection equipment, and low voltage control equipment and

wiring specified under this Division will be the responsibility of this Contractor. Installation of line voltage components and wiring specified under this Division will be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. Purchase and installation of low voltage components and wiring specified under this Division will be this Contractor's responsibility.

The mechanical contractor must coordinate with the electrical contractor on the division of responsibility pertaining to the purchase and installation of electrical control components. Any changes or additions required due to the specific nature of equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment.

All electrical work performed under this Division will be in compliance with the NEC and all applicable city and state ordinances. All controllers furnished with mechanical equipment shall have overload protection on all phases.

The mechanical contractor must coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure that all required components of control work are included and fully understood. No additional costs shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS Before substantial completion can be granted, the following items must be completed and submitted to

the Owner/Engineer: An approved Test and Balance Report. Operation test demonstrating proper operation of all equipment. Control diagrams, wiring diagrams, control sequences, and engineering data on components. Prior to the final inspection or consideration of final payment, the Contractor shall: Provide copies of permits, operating permits, and/or inspection certificates. Provide a check-out report. Provide operating and maintenance manual(s). Provide record as-built drawings. Return keys to the Owner. Deliver all spare parts. Touch up any damaged finishes. Provide a copy of attendance roster for equipment training sessions. Provide all warrantee certificates and documentation.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Nameplates. Pipe Markers.



Engineers. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials.

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS Air Handling Units: Nameplates. Piping: Pipe markers.

NAMEPLATES Manufacturers: Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. Or equal performance. Equipment Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background

color. Letter Color: White. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. Background Color: Black. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

PIPE MARKERS Manufacturers: Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. MIFAB, Inc.: www.mifab.com. Or equal performance. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe


markings.

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 05 53 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 3 EXECUTION


INSTALLATION Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient

adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 05 93 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of refrigerating systems. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. Commissioning activities.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning of HVAC.

REFERENCE STANDARDS SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association.

SUBMITTALS Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval

within 30 days after award of Contract. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed

and the specific approach for each system and component. Submit to the Commissioning Authority. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Include at least the following in the plan: List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed

and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted

and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the

process. Final test report forms to be used. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. Field Logs: Submit at least once a week to Commissioning Authority. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and

parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation.

Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

Submit to the Commissioning Authority within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for

Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that;

otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.


PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,

Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. SMACNA (TAB). Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to

Substantial Completion of the project. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke

detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.

TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. Having minimum of three years documented experience. Certified by one of the following: AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National

Performance Guaranty. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute:

www.tabbcertified.org. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.

EXAMINATION Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. Duct systems are clean of debris. Fans are rotating correctly. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. Air outlets are installed and connected. Duct system leakage is minimized. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

PREPARATION Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. Provide additional balancing devices as required.


ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or

minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space.

Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

RECORDING AND ADJUSTING Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: Running log of events and issues. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. Contract interpretation requests. Lists of completed tests. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be

restored. Set and lock memory stops. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross

reference the location in the final report. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has

been rectified. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to

electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air

quantities at site altitude. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create

objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and

total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.

Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries.

Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating.

For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.


COMMISSIONING See Sections 01 91 13 and 23 08 00 for additional requirements. Perform prerequisites prior to starting commissioning activities. Fill out Prefunctional Checklists for: Air side systems. Water side systems. Furnish to the Commissioning Authority, upon request, any data gathered but not shown in the final TAB

report. Re-check minimum outdoor air intake flows and maximum and intermediate total airflow rates for 10

percent of the air handlers plus a random sample equivalent to 5 percent of the final TAB report data as directed by Commissioning Authority.

Original TAB agency shall execute the re-checks, witnessed by the Commissioning Authority. Use the same test instruments as used in the original TAB work. Failure of more than 10 percent of the re-checked items of a given system shall result in the rejection of

the system TAB report; rebalance the system, provide a new system TAB report, and repeat random re-checks.

For purposes of re-check, failure is defined as follows: Air Flow of Supply and Return: Deviation of more than 10 percent of instrument reading. Minimum Outside Air Flow: Deviation of more than 20 percent of instrument reading; for inlet vane or VFD

OSA compensation system using linear proportional control, deviation of more than 30 percent at intermediate supply flow.

Temperatures: Deviation of more than one degree F. Air and Water Pressures: Deviation of more than 10 percent of full scale of test instrument reading. Sound Pressures: Deviation of more than 3 decibels, with consideration for variations in background

noise. For purposes of re-check, a whole system is defined as one in which inaccuracies will have little or no

impact on connected systems; for example, the air distribution system served by one air handler or the hydronic chilled water supply system served by a chiller or the condenser water system.

In the presence of the Commissioning Authority, verify that: Final settings of all valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices have been permanently

marked. The air system is being controlled to the lowest possible static pressure while still meeting design loads,

less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established control setpoints, and physical verification of at least one leg from fan to diffuser having all balancing dampers wide open and that during full cooling of all terminal units taking off downstream of the static pressure sensor, the terminal unit on the critical leg has its damper 90 percent or more open.

The water system is being controlled to the lowest possible pressure while still meeting design loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established control setpoints, and physical verification of at least one leg from the pump to the coil having all balancing valves wide open and that during full cooling the cooling coil valve of that leg is 90 percent or more open.

SCOPE Test, adjust, and balance the following: Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units Fans

MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED Electric Motors: Manufacturer Model/Frame


HP/BHP Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load RPM V-Belt Drives: Identification/location Required driven RPM Driven sheave, diameter and RPM Belt, size and quantity Air Cooled Condensers: Identification/number Location Manufacturer Model number Serial number Entering DB air temperature, design and actual Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual Number of compressors Electric Duct Heaters: Manufacturer Identification/number Location Model number Design kW Number of stages Phase, voltage, amperage Test voltage (each phase) Test amperage (each phase) Air flow, specified and actual Temperature rise, specified and actual Air Moving Equipment: Location Manufacturer Model number Serial number Arrangement/Class/Discharge Air flow, specified and actual Return air flow, specified and actual Outside air flow, specified and actual Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual Inlet pressure Discharge pressure Exhaust Fans: Location Manufacturer Model number Serial number Air flow, specified and actual


Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual Inlet pressure

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 07 13 - 1 DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Duct insulation. Duct Liner. Insulation jackets.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the

Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial

Applications. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National

Fire Protection Association. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each

service, and locations. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable

workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this

section with not less than three years of documented experience. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section,

with minimum 3 years of experience and approved by manufacturer.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including

product density and thickness. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by

storing in original wrapping.

FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and

insulation cements. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

INSULATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS The thickness schedules and the following descriptions specify the type of insulation, accessories, etc.,

and the thicknesses of insulation and the method of installation to be employed for each insulation system.

Ductwork, indoor: Ductwork: Rectangular. Blanket insulation: Glass fiber, K factor 0.24 @ 40 degrees F. with factory-applied vapor barrier jacket. Securement: Factory lap, sealed with adhesive and/or staples. Mechanical fasteners: Use on underside to support insulation whenever duct width exceeds 24 inches.

Install no closer than 3 inches from the joints. Vapor barrier tape: Install over all tears and penetrations of the vapor barrier. Ductwork, outdoor: Ductwork: Rectangular. Fibrous board insulation: Glass fiber board, K factor 0.28 @ 200 degrees F. with factory-applied vapor

barrier jacket. Securement: Factory lap, sealed with adhesive and/or staples. Mechanical fasteners: As required to support insulation wherever. Install no closer than 3 inches from the

joints. Vapor barrier tape: Install over all tears and penetrations of the vapor barrier. Weather barrier: Mastic reinforced with mesh and thoroughly sealed for weather tightness.

GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. Vapor Barrier Tape: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber

based adhesive. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage, 0.0508 inch diameter.

GLASS FIBER, RIGID Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.


Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. Vapor Barrier Tape: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber

based adhesive.

JACKETS Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. Finish: Smooth. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

DUCT LINER Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071; flexible blanket, rigid

board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite.

Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients: 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion

joints. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.


Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket.

Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with with calked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.

External Duct Insulation Application: Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to

match jacket. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to

prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without

disturbing wrapping. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for spacing. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for

insulation thickness.

SCHEDULES Combustion Air Duct: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inches thick. Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inches thick. Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inches thick with aluminum jacket. Outside Air Intake Ducts: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick. Plenums: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick. Plenums (Cooling System): Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick. Ventilation Equipment Casings: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick. Supply Ducts: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1-1/2 inches thick. Return Ducts in Unconditioned Spaces: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 2 inches thick. Return and Relief Ducts in Mechanical Rooms: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 2 inch thick

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 07 19 - 1 HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Piping insulation. Jackets and accessories.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each

service, and locations.


with not less than three years of documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three

years documented experience.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.

FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

INSULATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS The thickness schedules and the following descriptions specify the type of insulation, accessories, etc.

and the thicknesses of insulation and the method of installation to be employed for each insulation system.

Refrigerant piping, indoor: Pipe: By others, copper. Insulation: Elastomeric foam, K factor 0.23 @ 40 degrees F.


Securement: Tape or bands. Jacket: None required. Fittings: Form the insulation over portions of fittings and valves not requiring access. Neatly trim excess. Refrigerant piping, outdoor: Pipe: By others, copper. Insulation: Elastomeric foam, K factor 0.23 @ 40 degrees F. Securement: Tape or bands. Jacket: Weather barrier, stainless steel, fastened by contact adhesive with tape, fully lapped and sealed

for weather tightness. Fittings: Form the insulation over portions of fittings and valves not requiring access, neatly trim excess,

and cover.

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION Manufacturer: Armacell LLC; ______: www.armacell.us. Or equal performance. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M

Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

JACKETS Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. Thickness: 0.010 inch. Finish: Smooth. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,

valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. Inserts and Shields: Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may

be factory fabricated.


Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.

Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with stainless steel jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Provide two coats of UV resistant finish for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation without jacketing.

SCHEDULE Cooling Systems: Refrigerant: Temperature: below 40 degrees F. Pipe Size: Runouts 2 inches. Insulation: 1 inch. Pipe Size: 1 inch and less. Insulation: 1 inch. Pipe Size: 1-1/4 inch to 2 inches. Insulation: 1-1/2 inch. Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches to 4 inches. Insulation: 1-1/2 inch. Pipe Size: 5 inches to 6 inches. Insulation: 1-1/2 inch. Pipe Size: 8 inches and larger. Insulation: 1-1/2 inch. Temperature: 40 - 55 degrees F. Pipe Size: Runouts 2 inches. Insulation: 1/2 inch. Pipe Size: 1 inch and less. Insulation: 1/2 inch. Pipe Size: 1-1/4 inch to 2 inches. Insulation: 3/4 inch. Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches to 4 inches. Insulation: 1 inch. Pipe Size: 5 inches to 6 inches. Insulation: 1 inch. Pipe Size: 8 inches and larger. Insulation: 1 inch.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 33 00 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Air turning devices/extractors. Backdraft dampers - metal. Combination fire and smoke dampers. Duct access doors. Duct test holes. Flexible duct connections. Smoke dampers. Volume control dampers.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.

REFERENCE STANDARDS NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire

Protection Association. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


section, with minimum three years of documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three

years documented experience. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS Manufacturers: Carlisle HVAC Products: www.carlislehvac.com. Elgen Manufacturing: www.elgenmfg.com. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.


Or equal performance. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with

individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers, Inc.: www.louvers-dampers.com. Nailor Industries Inc.: www.nailor.com. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. Or equal performance. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air

moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.

BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - FABRIC Fabric Backdraft Dampers: Factory-fabricated. Blades: Neoprene coated fabric material. Birdscreen: 1/2 inch nominal mesh of galvanized steel or aluminum. Maximum Velocity: 1000 fpm (5 m/sec) face velocity.

COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers, Inc.: www.louvers-dampers.com. Nailor Industries Inc.: www.nailor.com. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. Or equal performance. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-

impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft.

Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. Provide end switches to indicate damper position. Locate damper operator on interior of duct and link to damper operating shaft.

Normally Open Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, closing upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices to ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally.

Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled.

DUCT ACCESS DOORS Manufacturers: Acudor Products Inc.: www.acudor.com. Elgen Manufacturing: www.elgenmfg.com. Nailor Industries Inc.: www.nailor.com. SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com. Or equal performance. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.


DUCT TEST HOLES Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded

plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. Maximum Installed Length: 14 inch.

SMOKE DAMPERS

VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers, Inc.: www.louvers-dampers.com. Nailor Industries Inc.: www.nailor.com. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. Or equal performance. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. Quadrants: Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris out of ducts during

construction. Thickness: 2 mils. High tack water based adhesive. UV stable light blue color. Elongation Before Break: 325 percent, minimum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

PREPARATION Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

INSTALLATION Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA

(DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic

dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts

and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92.


At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.

Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 34 16 - 1 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Backward inclined centrifugal fans. Forward curved centrifugal fans. Inline centrifugal fans. Motors and drives. Fan accessories.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers

Association, Inc.. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement

and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51). AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and

Control Association International, Inc.. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating

Seal. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

Maintain one copy of each document on site.





Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

FIELD CONDITIONS Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation: www.acmefan.com. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com. Or equal performance.

WHEEL AND INLET Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate,

backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

Forward Curved: Black enamelled steel construction with inlet flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; steel hub swaged to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screw.

HOUSING Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III,

adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard. For fans handling air downstream of

humidifiers, provide two additional coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing, where indicated.

BEARINGS AND DRIVES Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, selfgreasing ball bearings, with ABMA 9 life at 100,000 hours. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and

shaft guard. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for

motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid Fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor.

Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA (DCS); 0.106 inch thick, 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

ACCESSORIES Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes welded to inlet bell. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid. Scroll Drain: 1/2 inch steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.


PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section 23 33 00. Ensure

metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to Section 23 33 00.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 37 00 - 1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Diffusers. Registers/grilles. Roof hoods. Goosenecks.


REFERENCE STANDARDS AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association

International, Inc.. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of

Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size,

finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.


QUALITY ASSURANCE Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. Or equal performance.

RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern. Connections: Round. Frame: Provide surface mount and inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and

ceiling frame. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish. Color: As shown on drawings.

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 37 00 - 2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch grid core. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish. Color: As shown on the drawings Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.

WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other

device to set blades, vertical face. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish. Color: As shown on the drawings.

RECTANGULAR SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES Type: Streamlined blades with degree deflection, 1/8 x 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. Color: As shown on the drawings.

ROOF HOODS Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

GOOSENECKS Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) of minimum 18 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanized steel. Mount on minimum 12 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with

architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether

dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 23 81 27 - 1 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Air-source heat pumps. Air cooled condensing units. Indoor air handler (fan & coil) units for duct connection. Controls.

REFERENCE STANDARDS AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump

Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air-Conditioning, Heating,

and Refrigeration Institute. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating

and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2013 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15). ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and

Condensing Units that Operate at Subcritical Temperatures of the Refrigerant; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc..

NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association.

NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association.

UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..

SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring

diagrams. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant used, showing

compliance with specified requirements. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions,

installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and

registered with manufacturer. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Extra Filters: One for each unit.


section, with minimum three years of documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ___

years of experience and approved by manufacturer.

WARRANTY See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

SYSTEM DESIGN Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched factory-engineered and

assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. Heating and Cooling: Air-source electric heat pump located in outdoor unit with evaporator; auxiliary

electric heat. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory cleaned, dried,

pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line. Performance Requirements: See Drawings for additional requirements. Efficiency: Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 14, minimum. Comply with ASHRAE Std 90.1. Electrical Characteristics: Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions of Section 26 27 17.

INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTED SYSTEMS Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply

fan, heating and cooling element(s), controls, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer.

Air Flow Configuration: Upflow. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock

switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct or belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor

pulley. Motor: NEMA MG 1; 1750 rpm single speed, permanently lubricated, hinge mounted. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan sloped in all

directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve.

Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL 207. Manufacturers: System manufacturer.

OUTDOOR UNITS Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor and

condenser. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance with ASHRAE Std

23.1 and UL 207. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial propeller fan

resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset),

service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). Provide thermostatic expansion valves. Operating Controls: Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.


ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT Room Thermostat: Wall-mounted, electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat with remote

sensor to maintain temperature setting; low-voltage; with following features: Automatic switching from heating to cooling. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint. Thermostat display: Actual room temperature. System mode indication: heating, cooling, fan auto, off, and on, auto or on, off.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection.

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO



EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

ELECTRICAL


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 05 00 - 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART GENERAL

SUMMARY Section includes Electrical Basic Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26, 27, and 28 in addition to the

requirements of Division 01 - General Requirements and the General Conditions of the Contract.

RELATED SECTIONS Work described in this section is related to other work described in Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28

and may be related to work in other Divisions concerning structure or appearances. Review and become familiar with work required in other Sections in this Division and with work required in the other Divisions. Coordinate with other subcontractor(s) to assure that all issues arising between related Sections are resolved.

Bring to the attention of the Engineer prior to the cutoff date for Addenda any and all discrepancies in related work. Submission of a bid or proposal indicates that all costs for this work and related work are included in the bid for this work or within the bid or proposal for the related work.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS All electrical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the New Mexico Building codes, IBC, ANSI,

NEC, NFPA, Model Energy Code, and all applicable provisions of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate material or construction in excess of code requirements or visa-versa, the more stringent application shall govern.

Permits necessary for the performance of the work under this contract shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Final inspection by the Engineer will not be made, or certificate of final payment issued, until certificates of satisfactory inspection from the inspection authorities are delivered.





The Contractor shall determine and verify field measurements and field construction criteria for conformance with drawings and specifications and for conflicts with other items of construction, past or present. Contractor shall coordinate each submittal with the requirements of the work and of the contract documents and notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of the submission, of any and all deviations in the submittals from requirements of the work and contract documents.

No fabrication or work which requires submittals shall begin until submittals are returned with the Engineer's approval.

Identify variations for contract documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.


Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal.


The Engineer will review a submittal and, if necessary, a resubmittal of the same item. Subsequent resubmittals shall be accompanied by Contractor's purchase order to Engineer for all Engineer's review time and costs at Engineer's standard hourly billing rates. These reviews will be performed at the convenience of the Engineer.



Engineer will consider requests for substitutions only at submittal review. Clearly identify substitution. Document each request with complete data, substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with



complete with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may, subsequently, become apparent. Will reimburse Owner and Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with re-approval

by authorities.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Existing project conditions indicated on Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing

record documents. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. Verify removal of existing electric work. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

COORDINATION Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer’s instructions for equipment furnished

under other Sections to determine connection locations and requirements. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation and start-up of equipment

furnished under other Sections.

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Submit three (3) sets prior to final inspection, in 8-1/2" x 11" text pages, bound in three (3) D-side ring

binders with durable plastic covers. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and title of

project. Internally sub-divide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized with tab titling

clearly printed under reinforced, laminated plastic tabs. Contents: Directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Sub-

contractors, and major equipment suppliers. Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system. Project documents and certificates.



RECORD AS-BUILT DRAWINGS Maintain on site one set of record documents exclusively for the purpose of Record As-Built drawings. Record into Record Drawings, Project Manual and Product Data, the actual “as-built” Work including all

revisions. Include actual location of all work. Record information concurrent with the construction progress. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future references by Owner. Modify reproducible drawings and two (2) sets of the project manual, delineating recorded as-built

conditions of the project or Record Documents compiled from the job records. The Contractor may obtain reproducible drawings from the office of the Architect or Engineer.

Provide electronic (.DWG or.PDF) files of “as-built” conditions. Contractor may obtain electronic drawings from the office of the Architect or Engineer and must modify the electronic record documents. The Contractor shall submit the as-built drawings in electronic format and printed drawings on the medium specified. The Contractor may request Engineer to complete modifications to drawings. Such request must be accompanied by Contractor’s purchase order to Engineer for drafting services.

Completion of record as-built drawings is a condition of final inspection and consideration of final payment.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES See Division 1 for additional closeout procedures. See Paragraph 3.2 for Substantial Completion and Final Inspection Requirements.

FINAL INSPECTIONS One final inspection for completion of project will be performed by the Engineer. Any and all additional

inspections requested by the Contractor or required because of Contractor's failure to complete scope of work shall be paid for by the Contractor. Costs for additional inspections shall be assessed at the Engineer's hourly rates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

ROD ELECTRODES Manufacturers: Thompson Harger NLP Or equal performance Product Description: Copper or copper-clad steel, 1/2 inch diameter rod electrode, 10 feet in length.

NAMEPLATES Product Description: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplate, black letters on white

background. Letter Size: 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

WIRE MARKERS Product Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers with circuit or control wire

number permanently stamped or printed.


PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to meet

Regulatory Requirements. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where

indicated. Bond steel together. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. Provide isolated equipment grounding conductor for circuits supplying electronic cash registers and

personal computers. Make electrical connections to utilization equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

instructions. Verify that wiring and outlet rough-in work is complete and that utilization equipment is ready for electrical

connection, wiring, and energization. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment. Provide

interconnecting wiring where indicated. Install and connect disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated. Make conduit connections to equipment, using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in damp or

wet locations. Install pre-fabricated cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use

attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection

boxes. Install support systems sized and fastened to accommodate weight of equipment and conduit, including

wiring, which they carry. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion

anchors. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and

walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.

Do not fasten supports to piping, ceiling support wires, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. Do not drill structural steel members. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members. Install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four (4) anchors. Install steel channel supports to stand cabinets 1 inch off wall in wet locations. Install sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow

partitions. Identify electrical distribution and control equipment and loads served to meet regulatory requirements. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets.

Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. Install wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and

at load connections. Use branch circuit or feeder number to identify power and lighting circuits. Use control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams to identify control

wiring.


SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS Before substantial completion can be granted, the following items must be completed and/or submitted to

the Owner/Engineer. Test, adjust, and calibrate all systems. Provide typed panel directories installed in each panelboard. Label all electrical equipment properly. Prior to the final inspection or consideration of final payment, the Contractor shall: Provide copies of permits and/or inspection certificates. Provide a check-out report. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual(s). Provide Record As-built Drawings. Return keys to the Owner. Deliver all spare parts. Touch up any damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 05 34 - 1 CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). Flexible metal conduit (FMC). Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. Conduit fittings. Accessories.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC). NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors

Association. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National Electrical

Contractors Association. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and

Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and

Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel.


ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments

for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other

potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under

other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing

system and do not void the roof warranty. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before

proceeding with work. Sequencing: Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet,

junction and splicing points.

SUBMITTALS See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for submittal procedures.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to

complete wiring system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

CONDUIT APPLICATIONS Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and

product listing. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the

specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

Underground: Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-

coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metallic conduit (IMC),

PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where

emerging from underground. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized

steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.


Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

Embedded Within Concrete: Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use

galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit.

Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit.

Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit.

Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from concrete.

Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or PVC-

coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid

metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. Maximum Length: 6 feet. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: Transformers. Motors. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.


Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum

size requirements specified.

GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and

listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. Fittings: Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 514B. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression

(gland) type fittings are not permitted.

INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242. Fittings: Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 514B. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression

(gland) type fittings are not permitted. Or equal performance.

PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil. PVC-Coated Fittings: Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15

mil.

FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as

complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. Fittings: Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.


LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed

and labeled as complying with UL 360. Fittings: Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed

and labeled as complying with UL 797. Fittings: Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.

RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed

and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

Fittings: Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651;

material to match conduit.

ACCESSORIES Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to

be installed. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings

to be installed. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

INSTALLATION Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the

manufacturer. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111. Conduit Routing:


Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: Electrical rooms. Mechanical equipment rooms. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: Across floors. Across top of parapet walls. Across building exterior surfaces. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner

unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where

moisture may collect. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not

limited to: Heaters. Hot water piping. Flues. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. Conduit Support: Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports

and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or

other systems. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not

provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted

conduits. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit

clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where approved). Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply with the most

stringent requirements. Connections and Terminations: Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits

prior to making connections. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or

split couplings. Do not use running threads. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.


Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry

locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure,

provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. Penetrations: Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams,

without approval of Structural Engineer. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with

exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of

moisture and gases. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where

possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and

methods specified in Section 07 84 00. Underground Installation: Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: Underground, Exterior: 24 inches. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length for

service entrance where not concrete-encased. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be

concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above

ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial

temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed

by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.


FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions,

repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

CLEANING Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

PROTECTION Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry

of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 05 37 - 1 BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. Floor boxes. Underground boxes/enclosures.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: Conduit bodies and other fittings. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling

points. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates. Floor box service fittings. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices. Section 27 10 05 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant: Additional requirements for

communications systems outlet boxes.

REFERENCE STANDARDS NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and

Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 1). NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 2). NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; Society of Cable Telecommunications

Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/SCTE 77). UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes. UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination:


Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes

where indicated. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before

proceeding with work.

SUBMITTALS Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key. See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three


PART 2 PRODUCTS

BOXES General Requirements: Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and

product listing. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to

accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size

requirements specified. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or

required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.


Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.

Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with

threaded hubs. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL 514C. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be

supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected

gangable boxes. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by

38 mm) trade size. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated, with

25 percent spare terminal capacity. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. Floor Boxes: Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in accordance with Section 26

27 26; with partitions to separate multiple services; furnished with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

Use cast iron floor boxes within slab on grade. Use sheet-steel or cast iron floor boxes within slab above grade. Metallic Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable (with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to and after

concrete pour). Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating

type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts. Size: As indicated on drawings. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches. Applications:


Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8 load rating.

Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 15 load rating.

Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

INSTALLATION Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,

NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.

Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or

permitted. Box Locations: Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as required

where approved by the Architect. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 05. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different

mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches

horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be

reduced. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches

separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.

Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 34.

Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect:

Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.


Within joists in areas with no ceiling. Electrical rooms. Mechanical equipment rooms. Box Supports: Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and

methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used

for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. Install boxes plumb and level. Flush-Mounted Boxes: Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge

of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.

Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Cut box flush with finished floor after concrete pour. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box

sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices

exceeds 300 V. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and

methods specified in Section 07 84 00. Close unused box openings. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or

designated for future use. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

CLEANING Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

PROTECTION Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for

installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Electrical identification requirements. Identification nameplates and labels. Wire and cable markers. Voltage markers. Underground warning tape. Floor marking tape. Warning signs and labels.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power

conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates. Section 27 10 05 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant: Identification for communications

cabling and devices.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of

identification products. Sequencing: Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification

products have been installed. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

SUBMITTALS See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for submittals procedures. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

FIELD CONDITIONS Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three



PART 2 PRODUCTS

IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS Identification for Equipment: Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and

associated sections, compartments, and components. Switchboards: Identify ampere rating. Identify voltage and phase. Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and

spaces. Panelboards: Identify ampere rating. Identify voltage and phase. Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and

spaces using pencil. For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each

branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. Transformers: Identify kVA rating. Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers: Identify voltage and phase. Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. Time Switches: Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include location. Enclosed Contactors: Identify ampere rating. Identify voltage and phase. Identify configuration, e.g., E.O.E.H. (electrically operated, electrically held) or E.O.M.H. (electrically

operated, mechanically held). Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location. Service Equipment: Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits,

feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed.

Emergency System Equipment: Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment in accordance

with NFPA 70. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location of on-site

emergency power sources. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical equipment.


Use identification nameplate to identify switchboards and panelboards utilizing a high leg delta system in accordance with NFPA 70.

Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means.

Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size.

Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority having jurisdiction.

Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white stripes, 3 inches wide, painted in accordance with Section 09 91 23 and 09 91 13.

Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent.

Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.

Identification for Conductors and Cables: Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27 10 05. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded

power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:

At each source and load connection. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding

electrode conductors. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables. Identification for Raceways: Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for

accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches wide. Color Code: Emergency Power System: Red. Fire Alarm System: Red. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 05 19. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare

conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways. Identification for Devices: Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 10 05. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 27 26. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification on ceiling tile below

device location.


Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

Identification for Luminaires: Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power system.

IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS Identification Nameplates: Materials: Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with

beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four,

located at corners for larger sizes. Identification Labels: Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. Use only for indoor locations. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise

indicated. Format for Equipment Identification: Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. Legend: System designation where applicable: Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY". Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM". Equipment designation or other approved description. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. Minimum Text Height: System Designation: 1 inch. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10 feet above floor or

working platform. Color: Normal Power System: White text on black background. Emergency Power System: White text on red background. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background. Format for Caution and Warning Messages: Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and

maintenance. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated. Format for Control Device Identification: Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.


Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. Color: Black text on clear background.

WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-

adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. Do not use handwritten text. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

VOLTAGE MARKERS Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-

around type markers. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-

adhesive vinyl cloth type markers. Minimum Size: Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified. Legend: Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present. Markers for System Identification: Emergency Power System: Text "EMERGENCY". Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. Exception: Use foil-backed detectable type tape where required by serving utility or where directed by

Owner. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise

required for proper detection. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. Color: Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange background.

FLOOR MARKING TAPE Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl or polyester tape

with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes.

WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. Warning Signs: Materials:


Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. Warning Labels: Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels;

UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended

by label manufacturer. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

PREPARATION Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

INSTALLATION Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. Conduits: Legible from the floor. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. Devices: Outside face of cover. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces

using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and

edges properly sealed. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished

grade. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of

improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 27 26 - 1 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Wall switches. Wall dimmers. Fan speed controllers. Receptacles. Wall plates. Floor box service fittings.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

REFERENCE STANDARDS FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal

Specification. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls. UL 1917 - Solid-State Fan Speed Controls.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other

sections or by others. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment

to be installed. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide

suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to

proceeding with work. Sequencing: Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.


SUBMITTALS See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


years documented experience. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc.: www.leviton.com. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc.: www.legrand.us Cooper Wiring Devices / Arrow Hart: www.cooperwiringdevices.com Or equal performance. Source Limitations: Where possible, provide products for each type of wiring device produced by a single

manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not

less than that of the branch circuit. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed

outdoors or in damp or wet locations. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for receptacles installed in dwelling units. Provide GFI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. Provide GFI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens. Provide isolated ground receptacles for receptacles serving computers and electronic cash registers. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.

WALL SWITCHES Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver

alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.


Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

WALL DIMMERS Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following

square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings.

Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on the Drawings: Incandescent: 600 W. Fluorescent: 600 VA.

FAN SPEED CONTROLLERS Description: 120 V AC, solid-state, full-range variable speed, slide control type with separate on/off

switch, with integral radio frequency interference filtering, fan noise elimination circuitry, power failure preset memory, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1917.

Current Rating: 1.5 A unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings.

RECEPTACLES Manufacturers: Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide

accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and

listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.

Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. Convenience Receptacles: Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or

duplex as indicated on the drawings. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, with

ground contacts isolated from mounting strap; isolated ground triangle mark on device face; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

GFI Receptacles: GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and

loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular

decorator style.


Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

Tamper Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.

Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

Or equal performance.

WALL PLATES Manufacturers: Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide

accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. Size: Standard; __________. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. Brass Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, factory-coated to inhibit oxidation. Aluminum Wall Plates: Smooth satin finish, clear anodized, factory-coated to inhibit oxidation. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and

corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and

corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.

FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 with

components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation. Flush Floor Service Fittings: Single Service Flush Convenience Receptacles: Cover: Rectangular. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s). Single Service Flush Communications Outlets: Cover: Rectangular. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets: Cover: Rectangular. Configuration: Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s). Accessories: Tile Rings: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate specified covers. Carpet Flanges: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate specified covers.


PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly

sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring

devices. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

PREPARATION Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

INSTALLATION Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,

NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of wiring

devices provided under this section. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor. Fan Speed Controllers: 48 inches above finished floor. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the

same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame.

Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices

exceeds 300 V. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more

than one conductor to wiring device terminals. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to

proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. Install wall switches with OFF position down.


Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles

with grounding pole on left. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered

without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper

operation. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

ADJUSTING Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original

factory finish.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 28 13 - 1 FUSES

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Fuses.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards: Fusible switches. Section 26 28 18 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.

REFERENCE STANDARDS NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements. UL 248-4 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses. UL 248-8 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 8: Class J Fuses. UL 248-10 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 10: Class L Fuses. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses. UL 248-15 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 15: Class T Fuses.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated

fuses. Fusible Switches for Panelboards: See Section 26 24 16. Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 26 28 18. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for

actual equipment to be installed. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before

proceeding with work.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings,

interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation; ______: www.cooperindustries.com. Littelfuse, Inc.: www.littelfuse.com. Or equal performance.

APPLICATIONS Service Entrance: Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay.

15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 28 13 - 2 FUSES

Fusible Switches Larger Than 600 Amperes: Class L, time-delay. Feeders: Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay. Fusible Switches Larger Than 600 Amperes: Class L, time-delay. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay. In-Line Protection for Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Class CC, time-delay. Primary Protection for Control Transformers: Class CC, time-delay.

FUSES Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a

complete operating system. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. Comply with UL 248-1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as

indicated. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12. Class J Fuses: Comply with UL 248-8. Class L Fuses: Comply with UL 248-10. Class T Fuses: Comply with UL 248-15. Class CC Fuses: Comply with UL 248-4. Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses. Fuse Reducers: For adapting indicated fuses to permit installation in switch designed for fuses with larger

ampere ratings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and

nameplate data for equipment. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

INSTALLATION Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 51 00 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Interior luminaires. Emergency lighting units. Exit signs. Ballasts and drivers. Fluorescent emergency power supply units. Lamps. Luminaire accessories.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.

REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure

Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts - Supplements. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less)

AC Power Circuits; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical

Contractors Association. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts. UL 1598 - Luminaires.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by

others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.


Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

SUBMITTALS See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed

information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.


QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA

502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

WARRANTY Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three


PART 2 PRODUCTS

LUMINAIRE TYPES Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

LUMINAIRES Manufacturers: Acuity Brands, Inc.: www.acuitybrands.com. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.: www.hubbelllighting.com. Or Equal Performance. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Provide products complying with Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,

reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.


Recessed Luminaires: Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. Fluorescent Luminaires: Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where required. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy Sensors: Provide programmed start ballasts. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Provide with two ballasts. Luminaires with Two Lamps: Each ballast controls one lamp. Luminaires with Three Lamps: One ballast controls two outer lamps and one ballast controls inner lamp. Luminaires with Four Lamps: One ballast controls two outer lamps and one ballast controls two inner

lamps. HID Luminaires: HID High Bay Luminaires: Provide safety chain or power hook unless otherwise indicated. HID Luminaires with Quartz Restrike Systems: Factory-installed supplementary quartz lamp automatically

switches on when power interruption causes primary HID lamp to drop out or during cold startup.

EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes,

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage

drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

Battery: Sealed maintenance-free lead calcium unless otherwise indicated. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate

emergency operation. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. Accessories: Provide compatible accessory mounting brackets where indicated or required to complete installation. Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields.

EXIT SIGNS All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and

all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. Self-Powered Exit Signs: Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage

drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation.

Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. Self-Luminous Exit Signs: Internally illuminated by tritium gas sealed inside phosphor lined gas tubes,

requiring no electrical power to operate, with a service life of 20 years unless otherwise indicated. Accessories: Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields.


BALLASTS AND DRIVERS All Ballasts: Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state

ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. Fluorescent Ballasts: All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic ballasts complying

with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or

minus 10 percent. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 20 percent. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for integral thermal protectors. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible flicker. Lamp Operating Frequency: Greater than 20 kHz. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7. Lamp Wiring Method: Instant Start Ballasts: Parallel wired. Rapid Start Ballasts: Series wired. Programmed Start Ballasts: Provide parallel or series/parallel wired where available; otherwise series

wired is acceptable. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring resetting of power. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for T5 and smaller diameter lamp ballasts. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location

category A. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC

requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application. Provide high efficiency T8 lamp ballasts certified as NEMA premium where indicated. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections. Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts: Lamp Starting Method: T8 Lamp Ballasts: Instant start unless otherwise indicated. T5 Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of 0 degrees F, and

energy saving lamp(s) at a minimum of 60 degrees F unless otherwise indicated. Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts: Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output unless

dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker and with even tracking across multiple lamps.

Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed. Wall Dimmers: See Section 26 27 26. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting lamp(s) at a minimum of 50 degrees F. Dimmed Lamp Starting: Capable of starting lamp(s) at any dimmed preset without transitioning first to full

light output. Bi-Level Stepped Dimming Linear Fluorescent Ballasts:


Bi-Level Operation: Capable of being switched between full light output on all lamps, 50 percent of full light output on all lamps, and all lamps off.

Control Compatibility: Capable of being controlled by standard manual light switches or occupancy sensors unless otherwise indicated.

Lamp Starting Method: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting lamp(s) at a minimum of 50 degrees F. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 1029. Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts: All Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts: Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or

minus 10 percent. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 15 percent. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90. Provide thermal protection with automatic reset. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. Lamp Operating Frequency: Less than 200 Hz or as required to avoid acoustic resonance in lamp arc

tube. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.5. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of -22 degrees F. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location


requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application. Electromagnetic Metal Halide Ballasts: Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or

minus 5 percent. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90 unless otherwise indicated. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of -22 degrees F. High Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or

minus 5 percent. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90 unless otherwise indicated.

FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated

luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

Compatibility: Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts,

including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits. Lamps: Compatible with low-mercury lamps. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches

connected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

Battery: Sealed maintenance-free high-temperature nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated. Emergency Illumination Output: Luminaires with F32T8 Lamps: Operate two lamp(s) at a minimum of 1350 lumens unless otherwise

indicated with indicated illumination evenly divided between the lamps.


Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation.

Operating Temperature: From 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F unless otherwise indicated or required for the installed location.

LAMPS Lamps - General Requirements: Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified,

provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency

standards. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which

are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

Incandescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for lighting fixture; 130 V rated.

Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Beam pattern as indicated. Non-Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted lamp finish unless otherwise indicated. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for

luminaire. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

(TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

(TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Wattage as indicated, with bulb type, burning position, and base

type as required for luminaire. Metal Halide Lamps: Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Phosphor coated lamp finish unless otherwise indicated. Provide ANSI type O-rated protected metal halide lamps where required for open luminaires provided

with compatible exclusionary sockets. Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps: Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,000 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

(TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste. Average Rated Life: Not less than 24,000 hours for an operating cycle of ten hours per start.


ACCESSORIES Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted as

directed. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.

PART 3 EXECUTION


sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.


INSTALLATION Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of

luminaires provided under this section. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general

workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified

as suitable to do so. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. Recessed Luminaires: Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials

according to listing. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet

regulatory requirements for fire rating. Suspended Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for

specified mounting height. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet in length, with no more

than 4 feet between supports. Install canopies tight to mounting surface. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of

luminaire. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.


Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Connect such that each switch controls the

same corresponding lamps in each luminaire. Emergency Lighting Units: Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in

same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. Exit Signs: Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in

same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units: For field-installed units, install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated. Where installation inside

luminaire is not possible, install on top of luminaire. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal ballast(s)

in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. Install lamps in each luminaire. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations

prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect each product for damage and defects. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to

verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace

excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

ADJUSTING Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by

Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path

as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate

egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

CLEANING Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and

manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make

adjustments as directed. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

PROTECTION Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 26 56 00 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Exterior luminaires. Ballasts. Lamps. Poles and accessories. Luminaire accessories.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.

REFERENCE STANDARDS AASHTO LTS - Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic

Signals; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure

Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts - Supplements. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less)

AC Power Circuits; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; National Electrical

Contractors Association. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts. UL 1598 - Luminaires.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks, trees, walls,

fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height.

Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

SUBMITTALS See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed

information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings,


service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.



years documented experience. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written

instructions. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

LUMINAIRE TYPES Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

LUMINAIRES Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Provide products complying with Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,

reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise indicated. Recessed Luminaires: Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with

insulation and combustible materials. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. HID Luminaires: HID High Bay Luminaires: Provide safety chain or power hook unless otherwise indicated. HID Luminaires with Quartz Restrike Systems: Factory-installed supplementary quartz lamp automatically

switches on when power interruption causes primary HID lamp to drop out or during cold startup. Exposed Hardware: Stainless steel.

BALLASTS All Ballasts: Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).


Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.

Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent.

Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 20 percent. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for integral thermal protectors. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible flicker. Lamp Operating Frequency: Greater than 20 kHz, except as specified below. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7. Lamp Wiring Method: Instant Start Ballasts: Parallel wired. Rapid Start Ballasts: Series wired. Programmed Start Ballasts: Provide parallel or series/parallel wired where available; otherwise series

wired is acceptable. Lamp Starting Method: T8 Lamp Ballasts: Instant start unless otherwise indicated. T5 Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless

otherwise indicated. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring resetting of power. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for T5 and smaller diameter lamp ballasts. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location


requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application. Provide high efficiency T8 lamp ballasts certified as NEMA premium. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electromagnetic ballasts

complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1029. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or

minus 5 percent. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90 unless otherwise indicated. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of -22 degrees F.

LAMPS Lamps - General Requirements: Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified,

provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency

standards. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which

are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.


Incandescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for lighting fixture; 130 V rated.

Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Beam pattern as indicated. Non-Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted lamp finish unless otherwise indicated. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for

luminaire. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

(TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

(TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Wattage as indicated, with bulb type, burning position, and base

type as required for luminaire. Metal Halide Lamps: Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Clear lamp finish unless otherwise indicated. Provide ANSI type O-rated protected metal halide lamps where required for open luminaires provided

with compatible exclusionary sockets. Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps: Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,000 K unless otherwise indicated. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

(TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste. Average Rated Life: Not less than 24,000 hours for an operating cycle of ten hours per start.

POLES All Poles: Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associated supports

and accessories to be installed. Structural Design Criteria: Comply with AASHTO LTS. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA) of luminaire(s) and associated supports and

accessories to be installed. Dead Load: Include weight of proposed luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Shape: Round straight, unless otherwise indicated. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated.


ACCESSORIES Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 1/2" size, factory finished to match luminaire or

field-painted as directed. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted as

directed. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.

PART 3 EXECUTION


sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.


INSTALLATION Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of

luminaires provided under this section. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general

workmanship) and NECA/IESNA 501 (exterior lighting). Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. Recessed Luminaires: Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet

regulatory requirements for fire rating. Suspended Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for

specified mounting height. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of

luminaire. Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Maintain the following minimum clearances: Comply with IEEE C2. Comply with utility company requirements. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Install foundations plumb. Install poles plumb, using leveling nuts or shims as required to adjust to plumb. Tighten anchor bolt nuts to manufacturer's recommended torque. Embedded Poles: Install poles plumb as indicated. Grounding:


Bond luminaires, metal accessories, metal poles, and foundation reinforcement to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

Install separate service conductors, 12 AWG copper, from each luminaire down to handhole for connection to branch circuit conductors.

Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Install lamps in each luminaire.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect each product for damage and defects. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace

excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

ADJUSTING Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by

Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. Luminaires with Field-Rotatable Optics: Position optics according to manufacturer's instructions to

achieve lighting distribution as indicated or as directed by Architect.

CLEANING Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt,

fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make

adjustments as directed. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

PROTECTION Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

ATTACHMENTS Luminaire schedule.

END OF SECTION

15042 / Eunice Appartments 28 31 00 - 1 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit. Transmitters for communication with supervising station. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period.

RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 21 13 00 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Supervisory, alarm, and actuating devices installed in

sprinkler system. Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

REFERENCE STANDARDS 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities;

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and

Less) AC Power Circuits. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

SUBMITTALS See Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. Evidence of designer qualifications. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having

jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation: Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72

Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control unit

programming. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare

capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation

instructions, and circuit length limitations. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating

adequate battery power. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other

component that the components are compatible with the control unit. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract

documents. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents. Evidence of installer qualifications. Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.


Inspection and Test Reports: Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out. Operating and Maintenance Data: Revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during

closeout demonstration: Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same

manuals. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy

and computer format acceptable to Owner. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative

personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling.

Project Record Documents: Have one set available during closeout demonstration: Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart,

and voice messages by event. Closeout Documents: Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation

requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized

representative of authority having jurisdiction. Certificate of Occupancy. Maintenance contract.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire

protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction.

Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business.

Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification.

Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address. Contract maintenance office located within 50 miles of project site. Certified in the State in which the Project is located as fire alarm installer. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified

qualifications. Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory, and able to

provide the required training; trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer.


WARRANTY Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are

free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date

of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS Fire Alarm Control Units - Basis of Design: SELECT/ENTER MANUFACTURER NAME AND ENTER

MODEL NUMBER. Fire Alarm Control Units - Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Provided their products meet or exceed the

performance of the basis of design product, products of the following are acceptable: Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Gamewell-FCI: www.gamewell-fci.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Fire-Lite: www.firelite.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Notifier: www.notifier.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Silent Knight: www.silentknight.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Vista: www.security.honeywell.com. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.: www.sbt.siemens.com. Provide all control units made by the same manufacturer. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Gamewell-FCI: www.gamewell-fci.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Fire-Lite: www.firelite.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Notifier: www.notifier.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Silent Knight: www.silentknight.com. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Vista: www.security.honeywell.com. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.: www.sbt.siemens.com. Simplex, a Tyco Business: www.simplex-fire.com. Same manufacturer as control units. Provide all initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. Protected Premises: Entire building shown on drawings. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as listed: ADA Standards. The requirements of the State Fire Marshal. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Applicable local codes. The contract documents (drawings and specifications). NFPA 101. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts between

requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. Evacuation Alarm: Multiple smoke zones; allow for evacuation notification of any individual zone or

combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. Voice Notification: Provide emergency voice/alarm communications with multichannel capability; digital.


General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone unless otherwise indicated, with alarm notification in all zones on the same floor, on the floor above, and the floor below.

Hearing Impaired Occupants: Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling units. Fire Command Center: Location indicated on drawings. Master Control Unit (Panel): New, located at fire command center. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station. On-Premises Supervising Station: New proprietary station operated by Owner, located at Project Site. Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded system. Circuits: Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style A. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Within Single Building: Class B, Style 0.5. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. Spare Capacity: Initiating Device Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. Speaker Amplifiers: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. Master Control Unit: Capable of handling all circuits utilized to capacity without requiring additional

components other than plug-in control modules. Power Sources: Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. Secondary: Storage batteries. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: Sprinkler water control valves. Dry-pipe sprinkler system pressure. Dry-pipe sprinkler valve room low temperature. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: Sprinkler water flow.

COMPONENTS General: Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are

acceptable. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and

maintenance data. Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Analog, addressable type; listed,

classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Master Control Unit: As specified for Basis of Design above, or equivalent. Initiating Devices: Manual Pull Stations Smoke Detectors. Heat Detectors. Notification Appliances: Bells.


Speakers. Strobes. Circuit Conductors: Copper or optical fiber; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70;

except for optical fiber conductors. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. Provide the same standard lock and key for each key operated switch and lockable panel and cabinet;

provide 5 keys of each type Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is

received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. Install instruction cards and labels.

INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and

tests and for observation by their personnel. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise

inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as

required. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities;

document each inspection and test. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract

documents. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode

for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. Record all system operations and malfunctions. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow

Owner personnel to perform normal duties. At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form."

OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel: Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system. Classroom Instruction: Owner furnished classroom, on-site or at other local facility. Factory Instruction: At control unit manufacturer's training facility.


Administrative: One-hour session(s) covering issues necessary for non-technical administrative staff; classroom:

Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout. Basic Operation: One-hour sessions for attendant personnel, security officers, and engineering staff;

combination of classroom and hands-on: Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout. Maintenance Technicians: Detailed training for electrical technicians, on programming, maintaining,

repairing, and modifying; factory training: Initial Training: One 3-day session, pre-closeout. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and maintenance data

available during instruction.

CLOSEOUT Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record drawings,

input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction;

notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. Repeat demonstration until successful. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and: Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. Occupancy permit has been granted. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete.

MAINTENANCE Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty

period, to include the work described below. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the

maintenance contractor. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner: Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual

time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.

Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.

Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit.

Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security.

END OF SECTION


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

GEOTECNICAL


EUNICE, NEW MEXICO


Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable

Geotechnical Engineering ReportEunice 16 Project

NWC of Avenue M and 23rd StreetEunice, New Mexico

April 24, 2015Terracon Project No. 68155038

Prepared for:Eastern Regional Housing Authority

Roswell, New Mexico

Prepared by:Terracon Consultants, Inc.

Las Cruces, New Mexico

Geotechnical Engineering ReportEunice 16 Project ■ Eunice, New MexicoApril 24, 2015 ■ Terracon Project No. 68155038


EXECUTIVE SUMMARYA geotechnical exploration has been performed for the proposed Eunice 16 Project to belocated at the northwest corner of Avenue M and 23rd Street in Eunice, New Mexico. Terracon’sgeotechnical scope of work included the advancement of five (5) test borings to an approximatedepth of 16-1/2 feet below ground surface (bgs).

Based on the information obtained from our subsurface exploration, the site is suitable fordevelopment of the proposed project. The following geotechnical considerations were identified:

n The site soils consisted of silty sand with varying amounts of gravel from the surface tothe total explored depths. Groundwater was not encountered in the test borings at thetime of drilling.

n Conventional spread and continuous footings bearing on prepared native soils orengineered fill may be used for support of the structure. The on-site soils appearsuitable for use as engineered fill (if applicable) beneath foundations and floor slabs.

n Construction of floor slabs on prepared native soils or engineered fill composed ofapproved on-site or imported soils is considered acceptable for the project, providedsome movement can be tolerated.

n The 2009 International Building Code, Table 1613.5.2 IBC seismic site classification forthis site is C.

n Automobile parking areas – 2” AC over 6” ABC over 10” Compacted Subgrade or 5”PCC over 10” Compacted Subgrade. Heavy Vehicle Access and Drives – 3” AC over 6”ABC over 10” Compacted Subgrade or 6” PCC over 10” Compacted Subgrade.

n Close monitoring of the construction operations discussed herein will be critical inachieving the design subgrade support. We therefore recommend that Terracon beretained to monitor this portion of the work.

This geotechnical executive summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report fordesign and/or construction purposes. It should be recognized that specific details were notincluded or fully developed in this section, and the report must be read in its entirety for acomprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The section titled GENERALCOMMENTS should be read for an understanding of the report limitations.



TABLE OF CONTENTSPage

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................ i1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................12.0 PROJECT INFORMATION .............................................................................................1

2.1 Project Description ...............................................................................................12.2 Site Location and Description...............................................................................2

3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................23.1 Typical Subsurface Profile ...................................................................................23.3 Groundwater ........................................................................................................3

4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ......................................34.1 Geotechnical Considerations ...............................................................................34.2 Earthwork.............................................................................................................3

4.2.1 Site Preparation ........................................................................................44.2.2 Excavation ................................................................................................44.2.3 Subgrade Preparation...............................................................................44.2.4 Fill Materials and Placement .....................................................................54.2.5 Compaction Requirements .......................................................................54.2.6 Utility Trench Backfill ................................................................................54.2.7 Grading and Drainage ..............................................................................54.2.8 Earthwork Construction Considerations ....................................................64.2.9 Corrosion Potential ...................................................................................6

4.3 Foundation Recommendations ............................................................................64.3.1 Foundation Design Recommendations .....................................................74.3.2 Foundation Construction Considerations ..................................................7

4.4 Seismic Considerations........................................................................................84.5 Floor Slabs...........................................................................................................8

4.5.1 Design Recommendations ........................................................................84.5.2 Floor Slab Construction Considerations ....................................................9

4.6 Pavements ...........................................................................................................94.6.1 Design Recommendations ........................................................................94.6.2 Construction Considerations ...................................................................10

5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS ...............................................................................................11

APPENDIX A – FIELD EXPLORATIONExhibit A-1 Site Location PlanExhibit A-2 Boring Location PlanExhibit A-3 Field Exploration DescriptionExhibit A-4 to A-8 Boring Logs



TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

APPENDIX B – LABORATORY TESTINGExhibit B-1 Laboratory Testing DescriptionExhibit B-2 thru B-4 Laboratory Testing Results

APPENDIX C – SUPPORTING DOCUMENTSExhibit C-1 General NotesExhibit C-2 Unified Soil Classification System

Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 1

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORTEUNICE 16 PROJECT

NWC OF AVENUE M AND 23RD STREETEUNICE, NEW MEXICO

Terracon Project No. 68155038April 24, 2015

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This report presents the results of our geotechnical engineering services performed for theproposed Eunice 16 Project to be located at the northwest corner of Avenue M and 23 rd Street inEunice, New Mexico. Our geotechnical engineering scope of work for this project included theadvancement of five (5) test borings to a depth of approximately 16-1/2 feet below existing sitegrades.

The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineeringrecommendations relative to:

n subsurface soil conditions n groundwater conditionsn earthwork n foundation design and constructionn seismic considerations n pavement design and construction

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION

2.1 Project Description

Item Description

Site layout Refer to the Site Location Plan and Boring Location Plan (ExhibitsA-1 and A-2 in Appendix A)

Structures

The project site (approximately 1.0 acres) will include a two-story16 unit apartment complex (eight 1 bedroom units and eight 2bedroom units). The structure will have a ground contact area ofabout 5,300 square feet. Parking and drive areas are associatedwith the project.

Building construction The structure is planned to be wood framed supported by spreadand continuous footings with slab-on-grade.

Finished floor elevation Finished floor elevation is assumed to be at of slightly aboveexisting grade.



Item Description

Assumed maximum loadsColumns: 50 kipsWalls: 3.0 klfSlab: 150 psf

Assumed Traffic Loads Auto Areas: 14,000 ESALsHeavy Vehicle Areas: 50,000 ESALs

Grading in building area Cuts and fills of 1 to 2 feet may be required (assumed).Grading in parking area Cuts and fills of 1 to 2 feet may be required (assumed).Retaining walls NoneBelow grade areas None

2.2 Site Location and Description

Item DescriptionLocation NWC of Avenue M and 23rd Street in Eunice, New MexicoExisting site features Undeveloped Lot

Surrounding developments

North: BusinessEast: BusinessWest: Undeveloped lotSouth: Undeveloped lot

Current ground cover Native subgrade

Existing topography Relatively flat

3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile

Specific conditions encountered at the boring locations are indicated on the individual boring logs.Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in soiltypes; in-situ, the transition between materials may be gradual. Details for each of the borings canbe found on the boring logs included in Appendix A of this report. Based on the results of theborings, subsurface conditions on the project site can be generalized as follows:

Description Approximate Depth toBottom of Stratum (feet) Material Encountered Consistency/Density

Stratum 116-1/2 (total explored

depth) Silty Sand with varying

amounts of gravelMedium Dense to Very

Dense



Laboratory tests were conducted on selected soil samples and the test results are presented inAppendix B. Laboratory test results indicate that the surface and near surface soils exhibit lowto moderate compressibility potentials at in-situ moisture contents. The test results indicate thatthe soils have a moderate to high tendency for hydro-compaction when elevated in moisturecontent and loading. The soils did not exhibit expansion potential under a surcharge load of1,000 psf. Due to the granular nature of the soils and relatively high field penetration resistance,it is Terracon’s opinion that the moderate to high hydro-collapse potential exhibited in theconsolidation samples is due to sample disturbance and that low to moderate hydro-collapsepotential can be expected for the site soils.

3.3 Groundwater

Groundwater was not observed in the test borings at the time of field exploration. Theseobservations represent groundwater conditions at the time of the field exploration and may notbe indicative of other times, or at other locations. Groundwater conditions can change withvarying seasonal and weather conditions, and other factors.

4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

4.1 Geotechnical ConsiderationsThe site appears suitable for the proposed construction based upon geotechnical conditionsencountered in the test borings. Based on the geotechnical engineering analyses, subsurfaceexploration and laboratory test results, we recommend that the proposed structure be supportedby spread and continuous footings bearing on prepared native soils or engineered fill.Construction of floor slabs on prepared native soils or engineered fill is considered acceptablefor this project, provided some movement can be tolerated. On-site or approved imported soilscan be used as engineered fill (if applicable).

Geotechnical engineering recommendations for foundation systems and other earth connectedphases of the project are outlined below. The recommendations contained in this report arebased upon the results of field and laboratory testing (which are presented in Appendices A andB), engineering analyses, and our current understanding of the proposed project.

4.2 Earthwork

The following presents recommendations for site preparation, subgrade preparation, excavationand placement of engineered fills on the project. The recommendations presented for designand construction of earth supported elements including foundations, slabs and pavements arecontingent upon following the recommendations outlined in this section. All grading for thestructure should extend a minimum of five feet beyond proposed perimeter building walls.



Earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Terracon. The evaluation ofearthwork should include observation and testing of engineered fill, subgrade preparation,foundation bearing soils, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during the construction ofthe project.

4.2.1 Site PreparationPrior to construction or placing any fill, all vegetation (if applicable), and any otherwiseunsuitable materials should be removed from the construction areas. Wet or dry materialshould either be removed, dried or moisture conditioned and compacted. Exposed areas whichwill receive fill or be constructed upon, once properly cleared, should be scarified to a minimumdepth of 10 inches, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and compacted.

The site should be initially graded to create a relatively level surface to receive fill or beconstructed upon and to provide for a relatively uniform thickness of fill beneath the proposedbuilding structure (if applicable).

Although evidence of underground facilities such as septic tanks, cesspools, utilities andbasements was not observed during the site reconnaissance, such features could beencountered during construction. If unexpected fills or underground facilities are encountered,such features should be removed and the excavation thoroughly cleaned prior to backfillplacement and/or construction.

4.2.2 ExcavationIt is anticipated that shallow excavations (surface to a depth of about 2 feet bgs) for theproposed construction can be accomplished with conventional earthmoving equipment. Heavyduty or specialized equipment may be needed to advance excavations to depths greater thanfoundation bearing elevation (about 2 feet bgs) due to the very dense cemented silty sand soils.

The on-site soils may pump or become unstable or unworkable at high water contents.Workability may be improved by scarifying and drying. Overexcavation of wet zones andreplacement with granular materials may be necessary. Lightweight excavation equipment maybe required to reduce subgrade pumping.

4.2.3 Subgrade PreparationExposed areas which will receive fill or be constructed upon, once properly cleared andbenched where necessary, should be scarified to a minimum depth of 10 inches, conditioned tonear optimum moisture content, and compacted.

Subgrade soils beneath interior slabs, exterior slabs and beneath pavements should bescarified, moisture conditioned and compacted to a minimum depth of 10 inches. The moisturecontent and compaction of subgrade soils should be maintained until slab or pavementconstruction.



4.2.4 Fill Materials and PlacementEngineered fill should meet the following material property requirements:

Fill Type 1 USCS Classification Acceptable Location for PlacementNear Surface On-Site

SoilsSM All locations and elevations

Granular Import SM, SP or SP-SM 2 All locations and elevations

1. Controlled, compacted fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter anddebris. A sample of each material type should be submitted to the geotechnical engineer forevaluation.

2. Imported silty sand, poorly graded sand, or poorly graded sand with silt

4.2.5 Fill Material Placement and Compaction RequirementsItem Description

Fill Lift Thickness 10 inches or less in loose thickness

Minimum Compaction Requirements 1 95% of the materials maximum modified Proctor drydensity (ASTM D 1557)

Moisture ContentWithin 2% of optimum moisture content value asdetermined by the modified Proctor test at the timeof placement and compaction

1. We recommend that engineered fill be tested for moisture content and compaction duringplacement. Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate the specified moisture orcompaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked andretested as required until the specified moisture and compaction requirements are achieved.

4.2.6 Utility Trench BackfillAll trench excavations should be made with sufficient working space to permit constructionincluding backfill placement and compaction.

4.2.7 Grading and DrainagePositive drainage should be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life ofthe project. Infiltration of water into utility trenches or foundation excavations should beprevented during construction. Planters and other surface features which could retain water inareas adjacent to the buildings should be sealed or eliminated. In areas where sidewalks orpaving do not immediately adjoin the structures, we recommend that protective slopes beprovided with a minimum grade of approximately 5 percent for at least 5 feet from perimeterwalls. Backfill against footings, exterior walls, and in utility and sprinkler line trenches should bewell compacted and free of all construction debris to reduce the possibility of moistureinfiltration.



Downspouts, roof drains or scuppers should discharge into splash blocks or extensions whenthe ground surface beneath such features is not protected by exterior slabs or paving. Sprinklersystems should not be installed within five feet of foundation walls. Landscaped irrigationadjacent to the foundation system should be minimized or eliminated.

4.2.8 Earthwork Construction ConsiderationsUpon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisturecontent prior to construction of foundations and floor slabs. Construction traffic over thecompleted subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. The site should also be gradedto prevent ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. If thesubgrade should become desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should beremoved or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior tofoundation and floor slab construction.

Temporary excavations will probably be required during grading operations. The gradingcontractor, by his contract, is usually responsible for designing and constructing stable,temporary excavations and should shore, slope or bench the sides of the excavations asrequired, to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. All excavations shouldcomply with applicable local, state and federal safety regulations, including the current OSHAExcavation and Trench Safety Standards.

The geotechnical engineer should be retained during the construction phase of the project toobserve earthwork and to perform necessary tests and observations during subgradepreparation; moisture conditioning; re-compaction; placement and compaction of controlledcompacted fills; backfilling of excavations into the completed subgrade, and just prior toconstruction of foundations and floor slabs.

4.2.9 Corrosion PotentialIt is our opinion, based upon results of the corrosion potential testing from the general area, thatthe site should have a low corrosion potential to reinforcing steel and buried metal structures.However, if metal structures are to be used, the corrosion potential should be analyzed by themanufacturer and appropriate protection provided. Soluble sulfate testing in the general areaindicates that ASTM Type I/II Portland cement is suitable for all concrete on and below grade.Foundation concrete should be designed in accordance with the provisions of the ACI DesignManual, Section 318, Chapter 4.

4.3 Foundation Recommendations

The structure can be supported by spread and continuous footings. Design recommendationsfor foundations for the proposed structure and related structural elements are presented in thefollowing paragraphs.



4.3.1 Foundation Design RecommendationsDescription Value

Foundation Type Spread and Continuous Footings

Bearing Material Prepared native soils or engineered fill

Allowable Bearing Pressure 2,500 psfMinimum Embedment Depth Below FinishedGrade 18 inches

Total Estimated Settlement 1 inch

Estimated Differential Settlement ½ inch

Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within five (5) feet of the foundation forperimeter (or exterior) footings and finished floor level for interior footings. The allowablefoundation bearing pressures apply to dead loads plus design live load conditions. The designbearing pressure may be increased by one-third when considering total loads that include windor seismic conditions. The weight of the foundation concrete below grade may be neglected indead load computations.

Footings should be proportioned to reduce differential foundation movement. Proportioning onthe basis of equal total movement is recommended; however, proportioning to relative constantdead-load pressure will also reduce differential movement between adjacent footings.Additional foundation movements could occur if water from any source infiltrates the foundationsoils; therefore, proper drainage must be provided in the final design and during construction.

Footings and foundations should be reinforced as necessary to reduce the potential for distresscaused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings or otherdiscontinuities in masonry walls (if applicable) is recommended.

Foundation excavations, subgrade preparation and engineered fill placement (if applicable)should be observed by the geotechnical engineer. If the soil conditions encountered differsignificantly from those presented in this report, supplemental recommendations will berequired.

4.3.2 Foundation Construction ConsiderationsPrepared native soils or engineered fill (if applicable) is recommended below, and adjacent tothe edges of all footings. The engineered fill should extend laterally an additional distance of 8inches for each foot of excavation below the footings (if engineered fill is used). The engineeredfill (if used) should extend horizontally a minimum distance of 5 feet beyond the outside edge ofperimeter footings.



4.4 Seismic Considerations

Description Value2009 International Building Code Site Classification(IBC) 1 C2

Site Latitude 32.44156Site Longitude -103.17089

Spectral Response Accelerations SMs and SM1SMs = FaSs and SM1 = FvS1

Site Class C - Fa = 1.20, Fv = 1.72

SMS Spectral Acceleration for a Short Period (0.2 sec) 0.314gSM1 Spectral Acceleration for a 1-Second Period 0.076g

SDs = 2/3 x SMs and SD1 = 2/3 x SM1

SDS Spectral Acceleration for a Short Period (0.2 sec) 0.209gSD1 Spectral Acceleration for a 1-Second Period 0.050g1 Note: In general accordance with the 2009 International Building Code, Table 1613.5.2.2 Note: The 2009 International Building Code (IBC) requires a site soil profile determination extending to a depth of100 feet for seismic site classification. The current scope does not include the required 100 foot soil profiledetermination. The borings extending to a maximum depth of 16-½ feet, and this seismic site class definitionconsiders that medium dense or denser soil may be encountered below the maximum depth of the subsurfaceexploration. Additional exploration to deeper depths would be required to confirm the conditions below the currentdepth of exploration.

4.5 Floor Slabs

4.5.1 Floor Slab Design RecommendationsDescription Value

Interior floor system Slab-on-grade concrete for use with standard spread andcontinuous footings.

Floor slab supportPrepared native soils (minimum 10 inches in thickness) orengineered fill soils placed and compacted in accordance withEarthwork section of this report.

Modulus of subgrade reaction 200 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in)

Construction of floor slabs on prepared native soils or compacted fills composed of on-site orimported approved soils is considered acceptable for the project, provided some movement canbe tolerated.

In areas of exposed concrete, control joints should be saw cut into the slab after concreteplacement in accordance with ACI Design Manual, Section 302.1R-37 8.3.12 (tooled control



joints are not recommended). Additionally, dowels should be placed at the location of proposedconstruction joints. To control the width of cracking (should it occur) continuous slabreinforcement should be considered in exposed concrete slabs.

Positive separations and/or isolation joints should be provided between slabs and allfoundations, columns or utility lines to allow independent movement. Interior trench backfillplaced beneath slabs should be compacted in accordance with recommendations outlined in theEarthwork section of this report. Other design and construction considerations, as outlined inthe ACI Design Manual, Section 302.1R are recommended.

4.5.2 Floor Slab Construction ConsiderationsPrepared native soils or engineered fill is recommended below slabs-on-grade. The engineeredfill (if applicable) should extend horizontally a minimum distance of 5 feet beyond the outsideedge of perimeter footings. Some differential movement of a slab-on-grade floor system ispossible should the subgrade soils become elevated in moisture content. Such movements areanticipated to be within general tolerance for normal slab-on-grade construction. To reducepotential slab movements, the subgrade soils should be prepared as outlined in the Earthworksection of this report.

4.6 Pavements

4.6.1 Design RecommendationsDesign of pavements for the project has been based on the procedures outlined in the Design ofHot Mix Asphalt Pavements by the National Asphalt Pavement Association (NAPA) and ACI forPCC pavement. Assumed traffic criteria used for pavement thickness design includes single18-kip equivalent standard axle loads (ESAL's) of 14,000 for planned auto parking areas and50,000 for heavy vehicle access and drives. Actual design traffic loading should be verified.Reevaluation of the recommended pavement sections may be necessary if the actual trafficvaries from the assumed criteria outlined above. Recommended alternatives for flexible andrigid pavements, summarized for each traffic area, are as follows:

Traffic Area Alternative

Recommended Pavement Section Thickness (inches)Asphalt

ConcreteSurface

PortlandCement

Concrete

AggregateBase

CourseTotal

Parking andAutomobile

Parking Areas

A 2 --- 6 8

B --- 5 --- 5

Heavy VehicleAccess and

Drives

A 3 --- 6 9

B --- 6 --- 6



Each alternative should be investigated with respect to current material availability andeconomic conditions. Rigid concrete pavement, a minimum of 6 inches in thickness, isrecommended at the location of dumpsters where trash trucks will park and load or areas ofanticipated heavy vehicle loads. The above pavements sections should be placed oncompacted subgrade soils as referenced in section 4.2.1 Site Preparation of this report.

Concrete construction and placement for the parking and drive areas (including curb and gutter,drainage ditches, etc.) should be in accordance with the New Mexico Department ofTransportation guidelines.

Aggregate base course should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding six inches and should becompacted to a minimum of 95% Modified Proctor Density (ASTM D1557).

Asphaltic concrete mix designs should be submitted prior to construction to verify their adequacy.Asphalt material should be placed in maximum 3-inch loose lifts and should be compacted with ina range of 93% to 98% of the Maximum Theoretical Density (AASHTO T-209).

Recommendations for pavement construction presented depend upon compliance withrecommended material specifications. To assess compliance, observation and testing shouldbe performed under the direction of the geotechnical engineer.

4.6.2 Construction ConsiderationsPavement design methods are intended to provide structural sections with adequate thicknessover a particular subgrade such that wheel loads are reduced to a level the subgrade cansupport. The support characteristics of the subgrade for pavement design do not account forsettlement induced movements of subgrade such as the soils encountered on this project.Thus, the pavement may be adequate from a structural standpoint, yet still experience crackingand deformation due to settlement related movement of the subgrade. It is, therefore, importantto minimize moisture changes in the subgrade to reduce settlement.

Minimizing subgrade saturation is an important factor in maintaining subgrade strength andstability. Some distress of pavements is possible due to the sand subgrade soils. Waterallowed to pond on or adjacent to pavements could saturate the subgrade and cause prematurepavement deterioration. The pavement should be sloped to provide rapid surface drainage, andpositive surface drainage should be maintained away from the edge of the paved areas. Designalternatives which could reduce the risk of subgrade saturation and improve long-termpavement performance include crowning the pavement subgrades to drain toward the edges,rather than to the center of the pavement areas; and installing surface drains next to any areaswhere surface water could pond. Properly designed and constructed subsurface drainage willreduce the time subgrade soils are saturated and can also improve subgrade strength andperformance.



Periodic maintenance extends the service life of the pavement and should include crack sealing,surface sealing and patching of any deteriorated areas. Also, thicker pavement sections couldbe used to reduce the required maintenance and extend the service life of the pavement. Ifasphaltic concrete is used for this project, we recommend that reinforced concrete pads beprovided in front of and beneath trash receptacles. The dumpster trucks should be parked onthe rigid concrete pavement when the trash receptacles are lifted. The concrete pads at andadjacent to the trash enclosure should be a minimum of 6 inches thick and properly reinforced.

The performance of all pavements can be enhanced by minimizing excess moisture which canreach the subgrade soils. The following recommendations should be considered at minimum:

■ site grading at a minimum 2 percent grade away from the pavements.■ the subgrade and the pavement surface have a minimum 1/4 inch per foot slope to

promote proper surface drainage.■ consider appropriate edge drainage and pavement underdrain systems.■ install pavement drainage surrounding areas anticipated for frequent wetting.■ install joint sealant and seal cracks immediately.■ compaction of any utility trenches for landscaped areas to the same criteria as the

pavement subgrade.■ seal all landscaped areas in or adjacent to pavements to minimize or prevent moisture

migration to subgrade soils.■ place compacted, low permeability backfill against the exterior side of curb and gutter.

5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS

Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so commentscan be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendationsin the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation andtesting services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth-relatedconstruction phases of the project.

The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtainedfrom the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed inthis report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across thesite, or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of suchvariations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, weshould be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendationscan be provided.

The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication anyenvironmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or



prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about thepotential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken.

This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to theproject discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnicalengineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Sitesafety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In theevent that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report areplanned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be consideredvalid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of thisreport in writing.

APPENDIX A

FIELD EXPLORATION

SITE LOCATION PLAN

Eunice 16 ProjectNWC of Avenue M and 23rd Street

Eunice, NM

TOPOGRAPHIC MAP IMAGE COURTESY OF THE U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEYQUADRANGLES INCLUDE: EUNICE, NM (1/1/1979).

1640 Hickory Loop, Suite 105Las Cruces, NM 88005

68155038Project Manager:

Drawn by:

Checked by:

Approved by:

DF

DB

JDC

1”=24,000 SF

EUNICE 16

4/03/2015

Project No.

Scale:

File Name:

Date:A-1

ExhibitDB

BORING LOCATION PLAN

Eunice 16 ProjectNWC of Avenue M and 23rd Street

Eunice, NM1640 Hickory Loop, Suite 105

Las Cruces, NM 88005

DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY, AND ISNOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

68155038

AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY PROVIDEDBY MICROSOFT BING MAPS

DF

DB

JDC

AS SHOWN

EUNICE 16

4/03/2015

Scale:

A-2

ExhibitProject Manager:

Drawn by:

Checked by:

Approved by:

Project No.

File Name:

Date:

DB

B-3

B-5 B-2

B-1B-4


Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Exhibit A-3

Field Exploration Description

A total of five (5) test borings were drilled at the site on April 1, 2015. The borings were drilledto a depth of approximately 16-1/2 feet below the ground surface at the approximate locationsshown on the attached Site Location Map and Boring Location Plan, Exhibit A-1 and A-2. Thetest borings were located as follows:

Borings Location Depths (feet)B-1 and B-5 Proposed building site 16-1/2

The test borings were advanced with a truck-mounted CME-75 drill rig utilizing 8-inch diameterhollow-stem augers.

The borings were located in the field by using the proposed site plan and an aerial photographof the site, measuring from existing property lines and using a hand-held GPS unit. Theaccuracy of boring locations should only be assumed to the level implied by the method used.

Lithologic logs of each boring were recorded by the field engineer during the drilling operations.At selected intervals, samples of the subsurface materials were taken by driving split-spoon orring-barrel samplers. Bulk samples of subsurface materials were also obtained in someborings.

Penetration resistance measurements were obtained by driving the split-spoon and ring-barrelsamplers into the subsurface materials with a 140-pound automatic hammer falling 30 inches.The penetration resistance value is a useful index in estimating the consistency or relativedensity of materials encountered.

A CME automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split-barrel sampler in the boringsperformed on this site. The effect of the automatic hammer's efficiency has been considered inthe interpretation and analysis of the subsurface information for this report.

Groundwater conditions were evaluated in the borings at the time of site exploration. For safetyconsiderations, borings were backfilled immediately upon the completion of drilling.

16.5

SILTY SAND (SM), reddish-brown, very dense

trace gravel, white, carbonate indurated

reddish-brown

white, carbonate indurated

Boring Terminated at 16.5 Feet

6-23-27N=50

40-50/6"

50/6"N=50/6"

50/6"N=50/6"

225

6 90

NP

3447.5+/-

See Exhibit A-2

Hammer Type: AutomaticStratification lines are approximate. In-situ, the transition may be gradual.

LOCATION

DEPTH

Latitude: 32.44156° Longitude: -103.17089°

GR

AP

HIC

LO

G

NWC OF AVE M & 23RD ST. EUNICE, NEW MEXICOSITE:

WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS

Page 1 of 1

Advancement Method:Hollow Stem Auger

Abandonment Method:Borings backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion.

1640 Hickory Loop, Suite 105Las Cruces, New Mexico

Notes:

Project No.: 68155038

Drill Rig: CME 75

Boring Started: 4/1/2015

BORING LOG NO. B-1EASTERN REGIONAL HOUSING AUTHORITYCLIENT:ROSWELL, NM

Driller: M. Duenez

Boring Completed: 4/1/2015

Exhibit: A-4

PROJECT: EUNICE 16 PROJECT

See Exhibit A-3 for description of fieldprocedures.See Appendix B for description of laboratoryprocedures and additional data (if any).

See Appendix C for explanation of symbols andabbreviations.

TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL 6

815

503

8.G

PJ

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

S

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

ELEVATION (Ft.)

Approximate Surface Elev: 3464 (Ft.) +/- DE

PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

16.5

SILTY SAND (SM), reddish-brown

trace gravel, white, very dense, carbonate indurated

cobbles encountered


15-41-35N=76

36-45-50/4"N=50/4"

50/2"N=50/2"

50/2"N=50/2"

387 NP

3447.5+/-

See Exhibit A-2


LOCATION

DEPTH


GR

AP

HIC

LO

G



Page 1 of 1




Notes:


Drill Rig: CME 75



Driller: M. Duenez


Exhibit: A-5




TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL 6

815

503

8.G

PJ

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

S

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

ELEVATION (Ft.)


PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

16.5


trace gravel, light brown to white, dense, carbonate indurated

reddish-brown, medium dense


4-21-15N=36

12-12-21N=33

13-20-19N=39

8-7-11N=18

3411 NP

3448.5+/-

See Exhibit A-2


LOCATION

DEPTH


GR

AP

HIC

LO

G



Page 1 of 1




Notes:


Drill Rig: CME 75



Driller: M. Duenez


Exhibit: A-6




TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL 6

815

503

8.G

PJ

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

S

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

ELEVATION (Ft.)


PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

16.5



reddish-brown

white, carbonate indurated


15-41-35N=76

26-42-50/4"N=50/4"

30-40-30N=70

50/4"N=50/4"

3449.5+/-

See Exhibit A-2


LOCATION

DEPTH


GR

AP

HIC

LO

G



Page 1 of 1




Notes:


Drill Rig: CME 75



Driller: M. Duenez


Exhibit: A-7




TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL 6

815

503

8.G

PJ

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

S

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

ELEVATION (Ft.)


PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

10.0

15.0

16.5



SILTY SAND WITH GRAVEL (SM), white, medium dense,carbonate indurated

SILTY SAND (SM), trace gravel, reddish-brown, very dense


11-50/6"N=50/6"

41-50/6"

13-10-10N=20

11-27-30N=57

19

8

8

100

NP

3456+/-

3451+/-

3449.5+/-

See Exhibit A-2


LOCATION

DEPTH


GR

AP

HIC

LO

G



Page 1 of 1




Notes:


Drill Rig: CME 75



Driller: M. Duenez


Exhibit: A-8




TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL 6

815

503

8.G

PJ

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

S

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

ELEVATION (Ft.)


PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

APPENDIX B

LABORATORY TESTING


Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Exhibit B-1

Laboratory Testing

Soil samples were tested in the laboratory to measure their natural water content. Grain sizeanalyses, compression testing and moisture contents were also performed on selectedsamples. The test results are provided on the boring logs and presented in Appendix B.

Descriptive classifications of the soils indicated on the boring logs are in accordance with theenclosed General Notes and the Unified Soil Classification System. Also shown are estimatedUnified Soil Classification Symbols. A brief description of this classification system is attachedto this report in Appendix C. All classification was by visual/manual procedures, (ASTM D2487).Selected samples were further classified using the results of Atterberg limit testing, (ASTMD4318). The Atterberg limit test results are also provided on the boring logs.

Procedural standards noted above are for reference to methodology in general. In some cases,variations to methods are applied as a result of local practice or professional judgment.

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

0.0010.010.1110100

6 16 20 30 40 501.5 2006 810

22.1

38.1

33.6

19.0

1.6

0.7

0.6

24.1

14

LL PL PI

%Clay%Silt

41 3/4 1/2 60

fine

HYDROMETERU.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS

NP

NP

NP

NP

NP

NP

NP

NP

D100

Cc Cu

SILT OR CLAY

4

%Sand%GravelD30 D10

B-1

B-2

B-3

B-5

SILTY SAND(SM)

SILTY SAND(SM)

SILTY SAND(SM)

SILTY SAND with GRAVEL(SM)

NP

NP

NP

NP

0.091

0.157

0.179

0.184

0.176

0.745

12.5

9.5

9.5

37.5

B-1

B-2

B-3

B-5

2.5

5.0

5.0

10.0

GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

R B

Y W

EIG

HT

coarse fine

3/8 3 100 1403 2

COBBLESGRAVEL SAND

USCS Classification

76.2

61.2

65.8

56.9

D60

coarse medium

2.5

5.0

5.0

10.0

Boring ID Depth

Boring ID Depth

GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTIONASTM D422


PROJECT NUMBER: 68155038PROJECT: EUNICE 16 PROJECT

SITE: NWC OF AVE M & 23RD ST. EUNICE, NEW MEXICO

CLIENT: EASTERN REGIONAL HOUSINGAUTHORITY ROSWELL, NM

EXHIBIT: B-2

LAB

OR

AT

OR

Y T

ES

TS

AR

E N

OT

VA

LID

IF S

EP

AR

AT

ED

FR

OM

OR

IGIN

AL

RE

PO

RT

.

GR

AIN

SIZ

E: U

SC

S-2

681

550

38.G

PJ

TE

RR

AC

ON

2012

.GD

T 4

/24/

15

EUNICE 16 PROJECTEUNICE, NEW MEXICO TERRACON

1640 Hickory Loop, Suite 105LAS CRUCES, NEW MEXICO 88005

(575) 527-1700fax (575) 527-1092

CONSOL-B-1@ 5'.xls

BORING B-1 @ 5'SILTY SAND

USCS Classification:SM

DRY DENSITY= 90 lbs/ft3

MOISTURE CONTENT=5.5%

PROJECT NO. 68155038

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

10 100 1000 10000

PER

CE

NT

CO

NS

OLI

DAT

ION

/SW

ELL

STRESS POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT

SWELL/CONSOLIDATION CHART

water added

EUNICE 16 PROJECTEUNICE, NEW MEXICO TERRACON

1640 Hickory Loop, Suite 105LAS CRUCES, NEW MEXICO 88005

(575) 527-1700fax (575) 527-1092

CONSOL-B-5@ 5'.xls

BORING B-5 @ 5'SILTY SAND

USCS Classification:SM

DRY DENSITY= 100 lbs/ft3

MOISTURE CONTENT=7.5%

PROJECT NO. 68155038

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

10 100 1000 10000

PER

CE

NT

CO

NS

OLI

DAT

ION

/SW

ELL

STRESS POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT

SWELL/CONSOLIDATION CHART

water added

APPENDIX CSUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

TraceWithModifier

Water Level Aftera Specified Period of Time

GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGYRELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL

TraceWithModifier

Standard Penetration orN-Value

Blows/Ft.

Descriptive Term(Consistency)

Loose

Very Stiff

Exhibit C-1

Standard Penetration orN-Value

Blows/Ft.

Ring SamplerBlows/Ft.

Ring SamplerBlows/Ft.

Medium Dense

Dense

Very Dense

0 - 1 < 3

4 - 9 2 - 4 3 - 4

Medium-Stiff 5 - 9

30 - 50

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

Auger

Shelby Tube

Ring Sampler

Grab Sample

8 - 15

Split Spoon

Macro Core

Rock Core

PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION

Term

< 1515 - 29> 30

Descriptive Term(s)of other constituents

Water InitiallyEncountered

Water Level After aSpecified Period of Time

Major Componentof Sample

Percent ofDry Weight

(More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve.)Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance

Includes gravels, sands and silts.

Hard

Very Loose 0 - 3 0 - 6 Very Soft

7 - 18 Soft

10 - 29 19 - 58

59 - 98 Stiff

less than 500

500 to 1,000

1,000 to 2,000

2,000 to 4,000

4,000 to 8,000> 99

LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES

SA

MP

LIN

G

FIE

LD

TE

ST

S

(HP)

(T)

(b/f)

(PID)

(OVA)

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Descriptive Term(Density)

Non-plasticLowMediumHigh

BouldersCobblesGravelSandSilt or Clay

10 - 18

> 50 15 - 30 19 - 42

> 30 > 42

_

Hand Penetrometer

Torvane

Standard PenetrationTest (blows per foot)

Photo-Ionization Detector

Organic Vapor Analyzer

Water levels indicated on the soil boringlogs are the levels measured in theborehole at the times indicated.Groundwater level variations will occurover time. In low permeability soils,accurate determination of groundwaterlevels is not possible with short termwater level observations.

CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS

(50% or more passing the No. 200 sieve.)Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing, field

visual-manual procedures or standard penetration resistance

DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION

> 8,000

Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device. The accuracyof such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with +/- indicates that no actual topographical survey wasconducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographicmaps of the area.

Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dryweight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils haveless than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, andsilts if they are slightly plastic or non-plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may beadded according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are definedon the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency.

Plasticity Index

01 - 1011 - 30

> 30

RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES

Descriptive Term(s)of other constituents

Percent ofDry Weight

< 55 - 12> 12

No Recovery

RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS

Particle Size

Over 12 in. (300 mm)12 in. to 3 in. (300mm to 75mm)3 in. to #4 sieve (75mm to 4.75 mm)#4 to #200 sieve (4.75mm to 0.075mmPassing #200 sieve (0.075mm)

ST

RE

NG

TH

TE

RM

S Unconfined CompressiveStrength, Qu, psf

4 - 8

GENERAL NOTES

Exhibit C-2

UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A

Soil Classification

Group

Symbol Group Name

B

Coarse Grained Soils:

More than 50% retained

on No. 200 sieve

Gravels:

More than 50% of

coarse fraction retained

on No. 4 sieve

Clean Gravels:

Less than 5% fines C

Cu 4 and 1 Cc 3 E

GW Well-graded gravel F

Cu 4 and/or 1 Cc 3 E

GP Poorly graded gravel F

Gravels with Fines:

More than 12% fines C

Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F,G,H

Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F,G,H

Sands:

50% or more of coarse

fraction passes No. 4

sieve

Clean Sands:

Less than 5% fines D

Cu 6 and 1 Cc 3 E

SW Well-graded sand I

Cu 6 and/or 1 Cc 3 E

SP Poorly graded sand I

Sands with Fines:

More than 12% fines D

Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G,H,I

Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G,H,I

Fine-Grained Soils:

50% or more passes the

No. 200 sieve

Silts and Clays:

Liquid limit less than 50

Inorganic: PI 7 and plots on or above “A” line

J CL Lean clay

K,L,M

PI 4 or plots below “A” line J ML Silt

K,L,M

Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried

0.75 OL Organic clay

K,L,M,N

Liquid limit - not dried Organic silt K,L,M,O

Silts and Clays:

Liquid limit 50 or more

Inorganic: PI plots on or above “A” line CH Fat clay

K,L,M

PI plots below “A” line MH Elastic Silt K,L,M

Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried

0.75 OH Organic clay

K,L,M,P

Liquid limit - not dried Organic silt K,L,M,Q

Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat

A Based on the material passing the 3-inch (75-mm) sieve

B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add “with cobbles

or boulders, or both” to group name. C

Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded

gravel with silt, GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay, GP-GM poorly

graded gravel with silt, GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. D

Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded

sand with silt, SW-SC well-graded sand with clay, SP-SM poorly graded

sand with silt, SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay

E Cu = D60/D10 Cc =

6010

2

30

DxD

)(D

F If soil contains 15% sand, add “with sand” to group name.

G If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM.

H If fines are organic, add “with organic fines” to group name.

I If soil contains 15% gravel, add “with gravel” to group name.

J If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay.

K If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add “with sand” or “with gravel,”

whichever is predominant. L

If soil contains 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add “sandy” to

group name. M

If soil contains 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add

“gravelly” to group name. N

PI 4 and plots on or above “A” line. O

PI 4 or plots below “A” line. P

PI plots on or above “A” line. Q

PI plots below “A” line.